GOCAD® 2009.

1 User Guide

Part III Visualization

© 1997–2009 Paradigm B.V. and/or its affiliates and subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
The information in this document is subject to change without notice and should not be construed as a commitment by
Paradigm B.V. and/or its affiliates or subsidiaries (collectively, "Paradigm"). Paradigm assumes no responsibility for any
errors that may appear in this document.
The Copyright Act of the United States, Title 17 of the United States Code, Section 501 prohibits the reproduction or
transmission of Paradigm’s copyrighted material in any form or by any means, electronic or mechanical, including
photocopying and recording, or by any information storage and retrieval system without permission in writing from
Paradigm. Violators of this statute will be subject to civil and possible criminal liability. The infringing activity will be
enjoined and the infringing articles will be impounded. Violators will be personally liable for Paradigm’s actual damages
and any additional profits of the infringer, or statutory damages in the amount of up to $150,000 per infringement.
Paradigm will also seek all costs and attorney fees. In addition, any person who infringes this copyright willfully and for the
purpose of commercial advantage or private financial gain, or by the reproduction or distribution of one or more copies of
a copyrighted work with a total retail value of over $1,000 shall be punished under the criminal laws of the United States of
America, including fines and possible imprisonment.
The following are trademarks or registered trademarks of Paradigm B.V. and/or its affiliates or subsidiaries (collectively,
"Paradigm") in the United States or in other countries: Paradigm, Paradigm logo, Alea, Coherence Cube, Director,
DirectorGeo, EarthStudy 360, Echos, Epos, FastVel, FracMV, GeoDepth, Geolog, GeoScene, GeoSec, GeoSteer,
GOCAD, Interpret, Jacta, Kine3D, OpenGeo, OpsLink, Probe, Pump-It, Rock & Fluid Canvas, SeisEarth, SeisFacies,
SeisX, SKUA, SolidGeo, Stratimagic, Sysdrill, Vanguard, VoxelGeo, and/or other Paradigm products referenced herein.
Alea and Jacta software under license from TOTAL. All rights reserved.
Some components or processes may be licensed under one or more of U.S. Patent Numbers 5,570,106; 5,615,171;
6,765,570; and 6,690,820.
Some components or processes are patented by Paradigm and/or one or more of its affiliates under U.S. Patent Numbers
5,563,949; 5,629,904; 5,838,564; 6,092,026; 6,430,508; 6,819,628; 6,859,734; 6,873,913; 7,095,677; 7,123,258;
7,295,929; and 7,295,930. In addition, there may be patent protection in other foreign jurisdictions for these and other
Paradigm products.
All rights not expressly granted are reserved.

Published June 22, 2009

Contents

Part III Visualization

Chapter 1 Getting Started with Maps, Cross Sections, and Log Displays ................ 1-1
1.1 Introduction to Map, Cross Section, and Log Display ...................................... 1-2
1.2 Map, Cross Section, and Log Display Quick Tour ............................................ 1-5
1.3 Setting the Display in 2D Windows ................................................................ 1-8
1.3.1 Zooming a 2D View ......................................................................... 1-8
1.3.2 Setting Display Options in a 2D View ................................................ 1-9
1.4 Opening a New 2D Window.........................................................................1-11
1.5 What Is Synchronized Between 2D and 3D Views? ........................................1-12
1.6 Synchronizing the Pointer Between the 3D Viewer, 2D Views, and Epos
Applications ................................................................................................1-13
1.7 Exporting as a Graphics File, Printing, Saving, and Copying a 2D View ...........1-15
1.8 Displaying Legends, Color Bars, and Scale Bars in a 2D View .........................1-17
1.9 Previewing a 2D View and Preparing It for Printing ........................................1-22
1.10 Measuring Distance in the Active View .........................................................1-29

Chapter 2 Visualizing Data in the 3D Viewer............................................................ 2-1

2.1 Getting Started in the 3D Viewer .................................................................. 2-2
2.2 Opening Another 3D Viewer ......................................................................... 2-4
2.3 Working with Color Maps to Change the Appearance of Property Data........... 2-5
2.3.1 Quick Tour of the Colormap Editor.................................................... 2-6
2.3.2 Creating Color Maps and Accessing the Colormap Editor ................... 2-7
2.3.3 Assigning a Color Map to a Property ................................................2-10
2.3.4 Changing the Distribution Colors .....................................................2-10
2.3.5 Changing the Color Scale ................................................................2-11
2.3.6 Adjusting the Gradient with Anchors ...............................................2-14

Contents iii
Paradigm™

2.3.7 Adjusting Transparency ................................................................... 2-16

2.3.8 Managing Color Maps .................................................................... 2-18

Chapter 3 Visualizing Data in Log Displays .............................................................. 3-1

3.1 Quick Tour of the Log Display Window .......................................................... 3-2
3.2 Components of a Log Display ........................................................................ 3-5
3.3 Creating a Log Display .................................................................................. 3-8
3.4 Opening an Existing Log Display View .......................................................... 3-14
3.5 Editing Log Display View Settings ................................................................ 3-15
3.6 Working with Tracks ................................................................................... 3-18
3.6.1 Adding or Removing a Track from a Pillar or Pillar Template .............. 3-18
3.6.2 Showing or Hiding Tracks ............................................................... 3-19
3.6.3 Changing Track Settings with the Track Editor ................................. 3-20
3.6.4 Accessing the Display Settings for a Track ........................................ 3-21
3.6.5 Changing the Appearance of a Scale Track ...................................... 3-21
3.6.6 Changing the Appearance of a Log Track ........................................ 3-24
3.6.7 Changing the Appearance of an Interval Track ................................. 3-27
3.6.8 Changing the Appearance of a Stratigraphy or Chronostratigraphy
Track ............................................................................................. 3-30
3.6.9 Changing the Appearance of a Seismic Track ................................... 3-31
3.6.10 Changing the Appearance of a Synthetic Track ................................ 3-34
3.6.11 Changing the Appearance of a Schematic Track............................... 3-36
3.7 Working with Logs in Tracks ........................................................................ 3-39
3.7.1 What Can I Do with Log Data in a 2D View? ................................... 3-39
3.7.2 Showing or Hiding Logs or Lithology in Tracks ................................. 3-40
3.7.3 Adding or Removing an External Log in a Log Display ...................... 3-41
3.7.4 Adding an Image Log to a Log Track ............................................... 3-45
3.7.5 Changing Graphic Attributes of Log Curves in Tracks ....................... 3-46
3.8 Working with Well Markers in Tracks ........................................................... 3-55
3.9 Changing the Log Display Layout................................................................. 3-57
3.10 Exporting Logs to a CSV File ........................................................................ 3-60
3.11 Creating and Working with Pillar Templates ................................................. 3-61
3.11.1 Creating a Pillar Template ............................................................... 3-62
3.11.2 Creating Well Curve Name Aliases .................................................. 3-63
3.11.3 Adding or Removing Tracks in a Pillar Template ................................ 3-65
3.11.4 Changing Display Attributes of Tracks in a Pillar Template ................ 3-65
3.11.5 Working with Logs in a Pillar Template ............................................ 3-66
3.11.6 Working with Markers in a Pillar Template ....................................... 3-68
3.11.7 Applying a Template to Pillars ......................................................... 3-69
3.11.8 Managing Pillar Templates .............................................................. 3-70

iv Contents GOCAD® 2009.1 User Guide

 Part
III

Visualization
Chapter 4 Visualizing Data in Maps .......................................................................... 4-1
4.1 Creating a Map ............................................................................................ 4-2
4.2 Map Window Quick Tour .............................................................................4-15
4.3 Opening an Existing Map View .....................................................................4-17
4.4 Visualizing Objects and Properties on a Map .................................................4-18
4.4.1 Showing or Hiding Objects on a Map ...............................................4-19
4.4.2 Accessing Display Settings for an Object on a Map ...........................4-20
4.4.3 Accessing Display Settings for an Object Property on a Map ..............4-21
4.4.4 Visualizing a Point Set on a Map ......................................................4-21
4.4.5 Visualizing a Curve on a Map ..........................................................4-22
4.4.6 Visualizing a Surface on a Map ........................................................4-23
4.4.7 Visualizing a ShotLine Trace on a Map ..............................................4-27
4.4.8 Visualizing a Voxet on a Map ...........................................................4-27
4.4.9 Visualizing a Stratigraphic Grid on a Map .........................................4-30
4.4.10 Visualizing a Well on a Map.............................................................4-31
4.4.11 Visualizing a Gridded Surface (2D-Grid) on a Map ............................4-34
4.4.12 Visualizing a Cross Section Trace on a Map.......................................4-37
4.5 Visualizing Maps in the 3D Viewer................................................................4-38
4.5.1 Showing or Hiding Maps in the 3D Viewer .......................................4-39
4.5.2 Accessing Display Settings for Maps in the 3D Viewer.......................4-39
4.5.3 Visualizing a Map in the 3D Viewer..................................................4-39
4.5.4 Viewing Information about a Map in the 3D Viewer .........................4-41
4.5.5 Showing or Hiding Objects on a Map in the 3D Viewer .....................4-41
4.5.6 Changing the Display Settings for Objects Displayed on a Map in
the 3D Viewer ................................................................................4-42
4.6 Visualizing Features on a Map ......................................................................4-43
4.7 Editing Map View Settings ...........................................................................4-44
4.8 Measuring Distances and Areas on a Map .....................................................4-45
4.9 Editing Maps ...............................................................................................4-48
4.9.1 Working with Comments in Maps ....................................................4-48
4.9.2 Reshaping Contour Lines .................................................................4-49

Chapter 5 Visualizing Data in Geologic Cross Sections............................................. 5-1

5.1 Quick Tour of the Cross Section Window ....................................................... 5-2
5.2 Components of a Cross Section View ............................................................ 5-5
5.3 Creating a Cross Section View ....................................................................... 5-7
5.3.1 Creating a Cross Section View from Picks, Wells, and Curves ............. 5-7
5.3.2 Creating a Cross Section from a Voxet Section or Probe ....................5-13
5.3.3 Creating a Series of Cross Sections ..................................................5-15
5.3.4 Creating a Cross Section Along a Horizontal Well .............................5-21
5.3.5 Creating a Cross Section View from a Shotline .................................5-23
5.4 Opening an Existing Cross Section View .......................................................5-25

Rock & Fluid Canvas™ 2009 | Epos™ 4.0 Contents v

Paradigm™

5.5 Working with Tracks in a Cross Section View ................................................ 5-26

5.6 Working with Logs in a Cross Section View .................................................. 5-27
5.7 Working with Well Markers in a Cross Section View ..................................... 5-30
5.8 Displaying Features, Objects, and Properties in a Cross Section View ............. 5-31
5.8.1 Displaying Features in a Cross Section View ..................................... 5-32
5.8.2 Showing or Hiding Objects in a Cross Section View .......................... 5-32
5.8.3 Accessing Display Settings for an Object in a Cross Section View ...... 5-33
5.8.4 Accessing Display Settings for an Object Property in a Cross Section
View .............................................................................................. 5-34
5.8.5 Displaying a Point Set in a Cross Section View ................................. 5-34
5.8.6 Displaying a Curve in a Cross Section View ...................................... 5-36
5.8.7 Displaying a Surface in a Cross Section View ................................... 5-37
5.8.8 Filling a Structural Interpretation with Solid Painting ........................ 5-38
5.8.9 Displaying a ShotLine in a Cross Section View .................................. 5-39
5.8.10 Displaying a Voxet in a Cross Section View ...................................... 5-39
5.8.11 Displaying a Stratigraphic Grid in a Cross Section View .................... 5-41
5.8.12 Displaying a Projected Well and Data in a Cross Section View ........... 5-43
5.8.13 Displaying a 2D Grid in a Cross Section View ................................... 5-49
5.9 Displaying Cross Sections in the 3D Viewer .................................................. 5-51
5.9.1 Showing or Hiding Cross Sections in the 3D Viewer ......................... 5-52
5.9.2 Accessing Display Settings for Cross Sections in the 3D Viewer ......... 5-52
5.9.3 Visualizing a Cross Section in the 3D Viewer.................................... 5-52
5.9.4 Viewing Information about a Cross Section in the 3D Viewer ........... 5-54
5.9.5 Showing or Hiding Objects on a Cross Section in the 3D Viewer ....... 5-54
5.9.6 Accessing Display Settings for Objects Displayed on a Cross Section
in the 3D Viewer ............................................................................ 5-55
5.10 Changing Layout and View Settings in a Cross Section View ......................... 5-56
5.10.1 Changing the Layout in a Cross Section View .................................. 5-56
5.10.2 Changing the Main Axes in a Cross Section View ............................. 5-58
5.10.3 Editing View Settings in a Cross Section View .................................. 5-58
5.10.4 Locking the Aspect Ratio in a Cross Section View............................. 5-61

Index .................................................................................................. Index-1

vi Contents GOCAD® 2009.1 User Guide

 1
Getting Started with Maps,
Cross Sections, and
Log Displays
In this chapter • "Introduction to Map, Cross Section, • "Synchronizing the Pointer Between
and Log Display," page 1-2 the 3D Viewer, 2D Views, and Epos
Applications," page 1-13
• "Map, Cross Section, and Log Display
Quick Tour," page 1-5 • "Exporting as a Graphics File, Printing,
Saving, and Copying a 2D View,"
• "Setting the Display in 2D Windows," page 1-15
page 1-8
• "Displaying Legends, Color Bars, and
• "Opening a New 2D Window," Scale Bars in a 2D View," page 1-17
page 1-11
• "Previewing a 2D View and Preparing
• "What Is Synchronized Between 2D It for Printing," page 1-22
and 3D Views?," page 1-12
• "Measuring Distance in the Active
View," page 1-29

Overview Earlier topics introduce the 3D Viewer. (See Part I: Getting Started, Chapter 2,
"Visualizing Data in the 3D Viewer.") These topics introduce 2D views—maps,
cross section views, and log display views—and provide information about operations
that are common to 2D views.
Two-dimensional views help you to perform a quality check of your geologic data and
provide a foundation for geologic interpretation with the Well Correlation and
Stratigraphic Analysis module. For more information about geologic interpretation in 2D
views, see Part VII: Geologic Interpretation, Chapter 2, "Interpreting and Correlating Well
Data."

1-1
Paradigm™

1.1 Introduction to Map, Cross Section, and

Log Display
GOCAD offers functionality for creating 2D maps, well log display views, and
cross section views. You can copy your results to a document or create scaled graphics in
these formats: Computer Graphics Metafile (CGM), Bitmap (BMP), and Graphics
Interchange Format (GIF).
For more information about 2D views, see:
• "Map," page 1-2
• "Log display," page 1-3
• "Cross section view," page 1-3

Map You can create a 2D map, or horizontal slice, of your model and display:
• Reservoir grids, wells, fault gaps, surfaces, and cross sections

• 2D grids with rapid contour generation

• Spider plots to show accurate surface and bottom hole locations for deviated wells,
and marker locations along the well path
• Curves for cartographic and reference features
Figure 1–1 shows an example.

Figure 1–1 Map in

GOCAD

In this view, a surface with contour lines and wells (labeled C1 through C12) are projected
onto the map. The line labeled A and A' is the intersection of a cross section.

1-2 Getting Started with Maps, Cross Sections, and Log Displays GOCAD® 2009.1 User Guide
 Part
III

Visualization
Log display A log display view (sometimes referred to as a 1D view) offers enhanced functionality for
comparing well logs. You can:
• Create a log display view quickly and automatically from any log.

• Display any number of well logs in different tracks; create as many tracks as
necessary. (See Figure 1–2.)
• Align tracks along true vertical depth subsea (TVDSS) or measured depth (MD); in the
time domain, align tracks along two-way travel time or MD.
• Extract a property at the intersection of the well with a seismic cube, velocity grid, or
reservoir grid and display it as a log curve.
Figure 1–2 shows an example.

Figure 1–2 Log display

Cross section view A cross section view is a 2D vertical slice of your model. You can:
• Create a cross section that spans from well to well, displaying the wells with
TVD-corrected logs, or you can project wells onto the section with logs displayed
along the well path.
• Pick cross sections arbitrarily from any data—for example, horizons, faults, seismic
cube, velocity grid, or reservoir grid in 3D.
• Display well logs, stratigraphy, and facies on several tracks by using templates or
customizing each track for an exceptional display.
• Display the intersection of a seismic cube, velocity grid, reservoir grid, horizons, and
faults along any track.
• Display horizons, reservoir grids, seismic cubes, velocity cubes, and faults.
• Create specialized cross sections including seismic sections along any axis of seismic
cubes and cross sections along horizontal (deviated) wells.

Rock & Fluid Canvas™ 2009 | Epos™ 4.0 1.1 Introduction to Map, Cross Section, and Log Display 1-3
Paradigm™

The cross section view in Figure 1–3 highlights many of the 2D visualization possibilities
available in GOCAD.

Figure 1–3 Cross section

view in GOCAD

This view is a cross section view of a reservoir that was modeled with the 3D Reservoir
Grid Builder. The porosity property of the reservoir grid is superimposed on seismic
wiggles in the background. The blue and red lines represent faults. A well is projected
with the porosity log. Well markers indicate the top and bottom of the reservoir grid, and
the yellow and green well curves are density and sonic logs. The view also includes facies
interpretations in the center.
Figure 1–4 illustrates the same cross section view if you were to visualize it in 3D,
superimposed with the reservoir model. This image was created by displaying the
cross section view in the 3D Viewer.

Figure 1–4 Cross section

view visualized in 3D

1-4 Getting Started with Maps, Cross Sections, and Log Displays GOCAD® 2009.1 User Guide
 Part
III

Visualization
1.2 Map, Cross Section, and Log Display
Quick Tour
In GOCAD, with the Map, Cross Section, and Log Display module, you can create
log display views (sometimes called 1D views), map views, and 2D cross section views.
When you create a map view, cross section view, or log display view, GOCAD creates
objects that appear in the Object Tree: Map, Cross Section, and Log Display views (see
Figure 1–5).
You can open these views as 2D plots that appear in separate windows. By opening more
than one 2D window, you can access multiple 2D views at once and quickly switch
between them. The Objects tab for the map, cross section view, or log display view is
associated with the active view.
You can also display a Map object in the 3D Viewer as a horizontal plane or a
Cross Section object as vertical planes. When you view a map or cross section in the
3D Viewer, you can also display the intersection or projection of other objects on these
planes. For example, see Figure 1–6 and Figure 1–7 on page 1-7.

Figure 1–5 Objects

included with the Map,
Cross Section, and Log
Display module

From the Object Tree, you can access all of the Log Displays and Cross Sections in your
project.
In the Object Tree, you can:
• Right-click the Map, Cross Section, or Log Display object category to access a
shortcut menu with commands to create that type of view. When you create the view,
a separate window opens to display the view. The shortcut menu for the
Cross Section and Map object categories also includes commands to access the
Attributes dialog box and to show all or hide all in the 3D Viewer.
• Click the name of an existing cross section view or map to display an Attribute
toolbar for the object at the bottom of the GOCAD window.

Rock & Fluid Canvas™ 2009 | Epos™ 4.0 1.2 Map, Cross Section, and Log Display Quick Tour 1-5
Paradigm™

• Right-click an existing cross section view, map, or log display view to open a shortcut
menu with commands to open the Attributes dialog box, manage the objects (delete
and rename), open a new window, and open an existing view.
For information about how to open a new window, see "Opening a New 2D
Window" on page 1-11. For information about how to open an existing view, see
"Opening an Existing Cross Section View" on page 5-25.
Note The Delete and Rename commands are standard operations that work the same as for
other GOCAD objects. For more information, see Part I: Getting Started, "Renaming, Copying,
and Deleting Objects" on page 3-18.

• Select the check box next to a cross section view or map to display it in the
3D Viewer.
• Expand the list of existing cross section views or maps to see a list of objects that you
can display on the cross section view or map in the 3D Viewer. The objects listed
include all those that can be represented on the cross section view or map in 3D.
• Right-click an object type to open a shortcut menu with commands to show all or
hide all on the cross section or map in the 3D Viewer.
• Select the check box next to an object to show the projection or intersection of
the object on the cross section or map in the 3D Viewer. For examples, see
Figure 1–6 and Figure 1–7.
• Click the name of an object to display an Attribute toolbar for the object at the
bottom of the GOCAD window. You can use the toolbar to change display
attributes that are applicable in a 2D view.

Figure 1–6 Projection of a

surface onto a 3D map
Map in 3D with a surface
projected onto it

Surface

1-6 Getting Started with Maps, Cross Sections, and Log Displays GOCAD® 2009.1 User Guide
 Part
III

Visualization
Figure 1–7 Intersection of a stratigraphic grid on a 3D cross section

Cross section in 3D with the intersection of a stratigraphic

grid and simulated porosity displayed on it

Top surface

Bottom surface

Rock & Fluid Canvas™ 2009 | Epos™ 4.0 1.2 Map, Cross Section, and Log Display Quick Tour 1-7
Paradigm™

1.3 Setting the Display in 2D Windows

The Map, Cross Section, and Log Display windows each contain a View toolbar that
you can use to zoom the view and to access a dialog box in which you can edit the view
dimensions. Each window also has an Options toolbar, which you can use to specify view
options relevant to the type of view.
For more information, see the following topics:
• "Zooming a 2D View," page 1-8
• "Setting Display Options in a 2D View," page 1-9

1.3.1 Zooming a 2D View

You can use the View toolbar in the Map, Cross Section, and Log Display windows to
zoom in or out and edit view dimensions. All tools are not available in each window
because some of them do not apply to each type of view. Where available, you use them
the same way.
Important
• Zooming a view scales the data. You can return the view to the original scale that was
defined when you created the view or to the current scale defined in the View
Settings dialog box by clicking Reset Zoom .

• On a cross section view or log display view, Fit to View scales the tracks and the
data. The other zoom tools scale the data only. You can return the tracks to their
defined widths by clicking Reset Zoom .

View toolbar

Fit to View. Changes the zoom to a setting at which all objects selected for display
will be visible. In a cross section view or log display view, tracks are also zoomed—
to restore them to their defined widths, click Reset Zoom .

Note You might need to click twice.

Box Zoom. Zooms in on an area of interest in a map or cross section view. To

define the zoom area, click the button and then drag a box in the view. (This tool is
not available in the Log Display window.)

1-8 Getting Started with Maps, Cross Sections, and Log Displays GOCAD® 2009.1 User Guide
 Part
III

Visualization
Strip Zoom. Zooms in on a horizontal strip across an entire cross section view or
log display view. To define the strip, click , and then drag vertically along the
part of the cross section or log display that you would like to view in more detail.
(This tool is not available in the Map window.)

Zoom In. Zooms in by a factor of two.

Zoom Out. Zooms out by a factor of two.

Reset Zoom. Restores the data to a 1:1 scale, which is the scale defined when you
created the view or the revised scale as defined in the View Settings dialog box.

View Settings. Opens the View Settings dialog box in which you can edit the
dimensions and change settings such as the projection distance for a map or
cross section view. You can also use this dialog box to check the total plot size
before you print the view and change the scale. For more information, see "Editing
Map View Settings" on page 4-44, "Editing Log Display View Settings" on
page 3-15, and "Editing View Settings in a Cross Section View" on page 5-58.

1.3.2 Setting Display Options in a 2D View

You can use the Options toolbar in the Map, Cross Section, and Log Display windows
to specify display options, such as turning on pointer tracking, showing visual guides, and
showing a color map at the bottom of the view. All tools are not available in each window
because some of them do not apply to each type of view. Where available, you use them
the same way.

Figure 1–8 Options Cross Map Log

toolbar in each window Section Display

Legend. Shows the legend. For information about how to add a legend, see
"Displaying Legends, Color Bars, and Scale Bars in a 2D View" on page 1-17.

Colormap. Shows a color bar for every property displayed on a map or

cross section view. By default, the color bar is positioned at the bottom of the
view. You can display it on the right side by using the Legends dialog box (for
information, see "To show or hide the color bar, scale bar, or legend" on
page 1-19). (This tool is not available in a log display view.)

Rock & Fluid Canvas™ 2009 | Epos™ 4.0 1.3 Setting the Display in 2D Windows 1-9
Paradigm™

Scale. Shows the scale bar and a compass rose on a map; shows the scale bar only
in a log display view. By default, the scale bar is positioned on the right side of the
view. You can display it at the bottom of the view by changing the setting in the
Legends dialog box (for information, see "To show or hide the color bar, scale bar,
or legend" on page 1-19). (This tool is not available in a cross section view.)
Important If you zoom in or out, the scale accounts for the zoom—it does not
reflect the original scale (data units per paper unit) originally defined when you
created the map or log display view. You can return the view to the original scale
or to the current scale defined in the View Settings dialog box by clicking Reset
Zoom on the View toolbar.

Grid. Shows grid lines across a map or cross section view. (This tool is not available
in a log display view.)

Lock Aspect Ratio. Keeps the ratio of scaling constant when you zoom the view.
For more information, see"Locking the Aspect Ratio in a Cross Section View" on
page 5-61.

Figure 1–9 Coordinates

toolbar

Crosshair Pointer. Shows a visual guide: dashed lines that span the view
horizontally and vertically, with the origin at the location of the pointer. As you
move the pointer in the view, the coordinates of the pointer location display in the
X, Y, and Z boxes. The location is expressed as xy-coordinates in real space and the
time or depth value (z-coordinate) along the vertical axis. (This toolbar is not
available in a log display view.)
Note If you want to synchronize the pointers in a map or cross section view with the
3D Viewer or other Epos applications1, you need to turn on this tool. For more information,
see "Synchronizing the Pointer Between the 3D Viewer, 2D Views, and Epos Applications"
on page 1-13.

1. If you are running GOCAD in a Linux environment from an active Epos session (see "Starting an Epos
Session with GOCAD" on page 1-2), you can synchronize the pointer and send data from view to view
between GOCAD and other Epos applications.

1-10 Getting Started with Maps, Cross Sections, and Log Displays GOCAD® 2009.1 User Guide
 Part
III

Visualization
1.4 Opening a New 2D Window
If you want to create a new view of an existing map, log display view, or cross section
view, you can open a new window. The command is on a shortcut menu for the object
that you can access from the Object Tree.
For information, see the following topics:
• "To open a new Map window," page 1-11
• "To open a new Log Display window," page 1-11
• "To open a new Cross Section window," page 1-11

To open a new Map 1 In the Object Tree, expand the Map object type, right-click the map you want to open
window in a new window, and then click Open New Window to open the dialog box.

2 In the Map box, enter the map you want to open in a separate window.
3 Do one of the following:
• If you want to use inches for displaying and printing the map, click Display
inches.
• If you want to use centimeters for displaying and printing the map, click Display
centimeters.
4 In the Map units per display unit box, type the number of units in the map that you
want to include per inch or centimeter. If you type a zero, the scale for display and
printing will be computed automatically.
5 Click OK to carry out the command and close the dialog box, or click Apply to carry
out the command and leave the dialog box open.
The Map window opens and displays the map.

To open a new ♦ In the Object Tree, expand the Log Display object category, right-click the name of
Log Display window the log display view that you want to open, and then click Open 2D Window to
open the dialog box.

To open a new ♦ In the Object Tree, expand the Cross Section object category, right-click the
Cross Section window cross section view you want to open in a new window, and then click Open 2D
Window to open the dialog box.

Rock & Fluid Canvas™ 2009 | Epos™ 4.0 1.4 Opening a New 2D Window 1-11
Paradigm™

1.5 What Is Synchronized Between 2D and

3D Views?
If you change the solid color of an object in a map, cross section, or log display view and
then look at the object in the 3D Viewer, you will see your changes reflected. This color
attribute is synchronized, meaning that it takes effect regardless of which view you are
working in. The color map selected for a property is also synchronized.
However, showing and hiding objects is independent between views. You control whether
an object appears or not in each 2D or 3D view separately. For example, displaying an
object in the 3D Viewer does not display it in a cross section view and vice versa.

1-12 Getting Started with Maps, Cross Sections, and Log Displays GOCAD® 2009.1 User Guide
 Part
III

Visualization
1.6 Synchronizing the Pointer Between the
3D Viewer, 2D Views, and Epos
Applications
When you are working in a map or cross section view, you will often want to see how this
work relates to your 3D model. To see the orientation in 3D, you can synchronize the
pointer between the 2D view and the 3D Viewer.
In addition, if you are running GOCAD in a Linux environment from an active Epos
session, you can also synchronize the pointer and send data from view to view between
GOCAD and other Epos applications.
Figure 1–10 shows an example of synchronizing between a cross section view and the
3D Viewer.
In GOCAD, to synchronize between a 2D view and the 3D Viewer, you can do this by
using a combination of tools in the GOCAD window and the 2D view. When you enable
tracking in both views, you can visually track the pointer in the 3D view as you move and
manipulate objects in the 2D view.

Figure 1–10 Synchronized pointer between the 3D Viewer and a cross section

3D Viewer Cross section

For more information about tracking the pointer, see:

• "To synchronize the pointer between a 2D view and the GOCAD 3D Viewer,"
page 1-13
• "Pointer synchronization with Epos applications," page 1-14

To synchronize the 1 Arrange the Map or Cross Section window and the GOCAD window, so that you
pointer between a 2D can see both the 3D Viewer and the 2D view at the same time (for example, side by
view and the GOCAD side or one above the other).
3D Viewer
2 In the GOCAD window, click 3D Pointer on the Coordinates toolbar to enable
tracking in the 3D Viewer.

Rock & Fluid Canvas™ 2009 | Epos™ 4.0 1.6 Synchronizing the Pointer Between the 3D Viewer, 2D Views, and Epos 1-13
Applications
Paradigm™

3 In the 2D window, click the Crosshair Pointer .

Blue, dashed lines appear with the origin at the location of the pointer in the view.
This also enables tracking of coordinates of the pointer in the 2D view.
4 Move the pointer in the 2D view.
Visual guides appear in the 3D Viewer representing the x-, y-, and z-axes as dashed lines
with the origin at the location of the pointer.

Pointer In a 2D view, you can also click the Crosshair Pointer to track pointer movement so
synchronization with
that it is synchronized with a corresponding Epos view, such as BaseMap, 3D Canvas, or
Epos applications
StratEarth. Conversely, when you move the pointer in an active Epos view, it moves in a
corresponding path in the GOCAD view, as well as in other active Epos views.
To use pointer tracking with Epos applications, you must meet these requirements:
• You must start all of the applications from the same Paradigm Session Manager.

• Cursor tracking is enabled in the Epos user preferences (normally enabled).

1-14 Getting Started with Maps, Cross Sections, and Log Displays GOCAD® 2009.1 User Guide
 Part
III

Visualization
1.7 Exporting as a Graphics File, Printing,
Saving, and Copying a 2D View
The File toolbar in the Map, Cross Section, and Log Display windows provides quick
access to commands for exporting to a graphics file, printing, and copying a 2D view.
The File toolbar appears on the right side of the Map, Cross Section, and Log Display
windows.

Figure 1–11 File toolbar

Export as File. Opens a dialog box for you to save the view as a computer
graphics metafile (CGM), bitmap, or Graphics Interchange Format (GIF) file.

Print. Opens a dialog box for you to send the view to a printer.

Save Snapshot As. Opens a dialog box in which you can specify how to save a
screen capture of an active view. You can specify from which view to take the
snapshot, the file name and path, the image format, and the image size to save
in the file.

Copy Viewer Contents to Clipboard. Copies the view, which you can then
paste into another program by pressing CTRL+V.

For more information, see:

• "To save the view as a graphics file," page 1-15
• "To print the view," page 1-15
• "About saving a screen capture," page 1-16
• "To copy the view," page 1-16

To save the view as a With a map, cross section view, or log display view opened and set up how you want it to
graphics file appear in the graphics file, do the following:

1 On the File toolbar, click Export as File .

2 In the Save As dialog box, navigate to the folder where you want to save the file,
type the name of the file in the File name box, select the file type (Computer
Graphics Metafile, Bitmap, or GIF) in the Save as type box, and then click Save.

To print the view With a map, cross section view, or log display view opened and set up how you want it to
appear in print (see "Previewing a 2D View and Preparing It for Printing" on page 1-22),
do the following:

1 On the File toolbar, click Print to open the dialog box.

2 In the Print dialog box, select a printer and printing settings as necessary, and then
click Print.

Rock & Fluid Canvas™ 2009 | Epos™ 4.0 1.7 Exporting as a Graphics File, Printing, Saving, and Copying a 2D View 1-15
Paradigm™

The contents of the viewer are sent to the printer.

About saving a screen With a map, cross section view, or log display view open and set up how you want it to
capture appear in a screen capture, you can save a screen capture to an image file by using the
Snapshot command. You can access the command from the File toolbar by clicking Save
Snapshot As .

For more information about specifying the file type or resizing the screen capture, see
Part II: Data Import and Export, "Exporting a View to an Image File," page 2-66.
Note Before you carry out the command, ensure that no other windows overlap the view that you
want to capture.

To copy the view With a map, cross section view, or log display view opened and set up how you want it to
appear in the copy, do the following:

♦ On the File toolbar, click Copy Viewer Contents to Clipboard .

You can then paste the copy into another program (for example Microsoft PowerPoint) by
pressing CTRL+V.

1-16 Getting Started with Maps, Cross Sections, and Log Displays GOCAD® 2009.1 User Guide
 Part
III

Visualization
1.8 Displaying Legends, Color Bars, and
Scale Bars in a 2D View
You can add a legend to a map, cross section view, or log display view view by using the
Edit Legend Settings command (Edit menu). You can also display and control the
alignment and size of color bars in maps and cross sections and scale bars in maps and
log display views.
Where applicable, you can position these elements on the right side or at the bottom of
the view. You can also position legends in the bottom-right corner, or for a map view,
anywhere inside the boundary of the map.
For example, see Figure 1–12.
When you display a legend on your screen, it also appears in:
• Printed copies when you print the view
• Other programs where you paste a copy of the view
• Graphics files that you create by saving the view

Figure 1–12 Legend,

scale bar, and color bar
on a map

For information about how to add and set up the legend, see:
• "To specify the view description," page 1-18
• "To show or hide the color bar, scale bar, or legend," page 1-19
• "To change the dimensions of the color bar or scale bar," page 1-20

Rock & Fluid Canvas™ 2009 | Epos™ 4.0 1.8 Displaying Legends, Color Bars, and Scale Bars in a 2D View 1-17
Paradigm™

To specify the view 1 In the Map, Cross Section, or Log Display window, click the Edit menu, click Edit
description Legend Settings to open the dialog box, and then click the Content tab.

On the Content tab, enter the information for the description area of the legend.
The description area sizes to its contents.

2 To specify an alternative legend, click and browse to an HTML file that contains
the legend that you want to use. You may need to adjust the size of the legend, by
editing the HTML file or changing the legend width in the Dimensions tab.
Notes

• The alternative legend is static. To refresh it, redisplay the view or click Legend twice.
• When you use an alternative legend, the fields on the Content tab are ignored.

3 If you want to change the title that appears at the top of the description, type it in
the Title box. The default title corresponds to the name of the map, cross section
view, or log display view.

4 To add your company logo to the legend, click to open the Choose a Logo File
dialog box, find and select the graphic file, and then click Open. The image must
have the .png, .xpm, or .jpg file name extension.
5 In the Company name, Project, Location, and Author boxes, type the relevant
information for each item.
6 To change the creation date and time (using a 24-hour clock), do any of the
following:
• To change the creation date, select the date you want in the Created box.
• To change the creation time, select the time you want in the at box.
• To reset the values to the local date and time, click .
7 In the Comments box, type the comments that you want to appear in the legend.

1-18 Getting Started with Maps, Cross Sections, and Log Displays GOCAD® 2009.1 User Guide
 Part
III

Visualization
8 To import a legend from a .html file, to the right of the Alternative legend box,
click to open the Choose an html legend file dialog box, and then double-click
the .html file name.
9 To finish the setup, do any of the following:
• To change the alignment of the legend (by default, the legend appears in the
bottom-right corner of the view), click the General tab and choose the
alignment you want. For more information, see "To show or hide the color bar,
scale bar, or legend" on page 1-19.
• To change the alignment of the color bars on a map or cross section view (by
default, the color bars appear on the right side of the view), click the General
tab and choose the alignment you want. For more information, see "To show or
hide the color bar, scale bar, or legend" on page 1-19.
• To change the alignment of the scale bars on a map or log display view (by
default, the scale bar appears at the bottom of the view), click the General tab
and choose the alignment you want. For more information, see "To show or hide
the color bar, scale bar, or legend" on page 1-19.
• To change the size of the legend, scale bar, or color bar, click the Dimensions tab
and change the settings. For more information, see "To change the dimensions of
the color bar or scale bar" on page 1-20.
10 When you finish setting the legend, color bar, and scale bar the way you want them,
click OK to carry out the command and close the dialog box.

To show or hide the 1 If necessary, in the Map, Cross Section, or Log Display window, click the Edit
color bar, scale bar, or menu, click Edit Legend Settings to open the dialog box, and then click the
legend General tab.

2 To show or hide the color bar (applies to map and cross section view only), scale bar
(applies to log display view and map only), or legend, select or clear the
corresponding check box. In a map view, selecting the scale bar also displays a
compass rose.

Tip You can also click Legend , Colormap , and Scale on the Options toolbar
to show or hide the legend, color bar, and scale bar.

3 To change the alignment of the color bar for each property displayed in the view, click
the option you want to use:

Rock & Fluid Canvas™ 2009 | Epos™ 4.0 1.8 Displaying Legends, Color Bars, and Scale Bars in a 2D View 1-19
Paradigm™

• Right. Orients the color bar vertically and centers it on the right side of the view.
If more than one property is displayed in the view, the color bars will be arranged
one above the other.
• Bottom. Orients the color bar horizontally and centers it at the bottom of the
view. If more than one property is displayed in the view, the color bars will be
arranged side by side.
By selecting options on the Dimensions tab, you can change the size of the color
bar. For information, see "To change the dimensions of the color bar or scale bar" on
page 1-20.
4 To change the alignment of the scale bar, click the option you want to use:
• Right. Orients the scale bar vertically and centers it on the right side of the view.
• Bottom. Orients the scale bar horizontally and centers it at the bottom of the
view.
By selecting options on the Dimensions tab, you can change the size of the scale bar.
For information, see "To change the dimensions of the color bar or scale bar" on
page 1-20.
5 To change the alignment of the legend, do any of the following:
• If you want the legend to appear in the bottom-right corner of the view, select
the Bottom check box and the Right check box.
• If you want the legend to be centered in the bottom of the view, select the
Bottom check box and clear the Right check box.
• If you want the legend to be centered on the right side of the view, clear the
Bottom check box and select the Right check box.
• In the Map window, if you want the legend to appear inside the boundaries of
the map, select the Inside check box. You can then reposition the legend
anywhere inside the map by dragging it.
6 When you finish setting the legend, color bar, and scale bar the way you want them,
click OK to carry out the command and close the dialog box.

To change the 1 If necessary, in the Map, Cross Section, or Log Display window, click the Edit
dimensions of the menu, click Edit Legend Settings to open the dialog box, and then click the
color bar or scale bar Dimensions tab.

1-20 Getting Started with Maps, Cross Sections, and Log Displays GOCAD® 2009.1 User Guide
 Part
III

Visualization
2 To change the dimensions of the color bars in a map or cross section view view, in the
Colorbar size area, type the value you want in the Length box and in the Width
box.
3 To change the dimensions of the scale bar in a map or log display view view, in the
Scale bar size area, type the values you want in the Length box and in the Width
box.
4 To change the dimensions of the legend box, in the Legend box maximum size
area, type a new value in the Width box.
The width of the legend box increases or decreases to the value you specify, and the
length increases or decreases proportionally.
5 When you finish setting the legend, color bar, and scale bar the way you want them,
click OK to carry out the command and close the dialog box.

Rock & Fluid Canvas™ 2009 | Epos™ 4.0 1.8 Displaying Legends, Color Bars, and Scale Bars in a 2D View 1-21
Paradigm™

1.9 Previewing a 2D View and Preparing It

for Printing
Before you print a 2D view, you can preview and adjust the print settings if needed. For
more information, see:
• "To preview a 2D view," page 1-22
• "To change the page setup," page 1-23
• "Example: Print a map to a plotter" on page 1-25

To preview a 2D view
1 In a Map, Cross Section, or Log Display window, click Reset Zoom on the
View toolbar to restore the view to the original scale that was defined when you
created the view or to the current scale defined in the Edit Dimensions dialog box.
2 On the File menu, click Print Preview to display the view in the Print Preview
window.
A "page" appears for each piece of paper that is required to print the view with the
current print settings. In the following example, the preview shows that two
8.5 × 11-inch pieces of paper are required to print the view in a portrait orientation.

3 Optionally, do any of the following:

• If you are satisfied with the results and want to print the view, click Print to open
the Print dialog box.

1-22 Getting Started with Maps, Cross Sections, and Log Displays GOCAD® 2009.1 User Guide
 Part
III

Visualization
• If you want to change the page setup (paper size, margins, orientation, and so
on), click Settings to open the Print Setup dialog box. After you change the
settings as explained in "To change the page setup" on page 1-23, the Print
Preview window shows the results.
• If you want to zoom the preview, change the percentage in the box at the top of
the window.
4 When you finish previewing, click Close to close the window.

To change the page 1 In a Map, Cross Section, or Log Display window, click the File menu, and then click
setup Page Setup to open the dialog box.
– or –
In the Print Preview window, click Settings to open the dialog box.

Note Your printer does not communicate its settings (available paper sizes, for example) to the
Print Setup dialog box. We recommend that you become familiar with the capabilities of your
printer before adjusting any of the settings in this dialog box.

2 In the Page settings area, do any of the following to adjust the page settings:
Tip You can restore the • To change the paper size, in the Format box, select the format you want—for
settings in the Print Setup example, Letter, A4, Legal, and Custom. Ensure that you choose a paper size
dialog box to their default
values at any time by
that your printer supports. If you choose Custom, type the paper size in the
clicking Reset at the bottom Width and Height boxes.
of the dialog box.
• To change the margins, clear the Auto check box, and then type the values you
want in the Top, Bottom, Left, and Right boxes.
• To change the orientation of the paper, in the Orientation box, select Portrait
or Landscape.
• To change the preferred units for measurements displayed in the Print Setup
dialog box, in the Units box, select the units you want.

Rock & Fluid Canvas™ 2009 | Epos™ 4.0 1.9 Previewing a 2D View and Preparing It for Printing 1-23
Paradigm™

3 In the Print mode area, do any of the following:

If you want to Do this

Allow the view to print on 1 In the Page Mode box, select Multiple.
multiple pages without scaling 2 In the Fit mode box, select As Is.
the view Under Output Settings, the values in the Width and Height
boxes indicate the view dimensions, which correspond to the
dimensions of the paper required to print the view.
In the example shown in step 1 on page 1-23, the view is
12.1 in. wide × 10.2 in. high and does not fit on one 8.5 in. ×
11 in. (Letter size) page. Printing the view with these settings
requires two 8.5 in. × 11 in. pages.
Allow the view to print on 1 In the Page Mode box, select Multiple.
multiple pages and scale the view 2 In the Fit mode box, select Scale.
3 Under Output settings, type the value for the width of
the view in the Width box and the value for the height of
the view in the Height box.
These dimensions correspond to the dimensions of the
paper required to print the view.
The values are in the units specified in the Units box.
4 If you want to link the aspect ratio of the width and height,
select the Keep aspect ratio check box.
This option keeps the view from becoming distorted. If you
leave the check box cleared, the view is not scaled by the
same amount in both directions and might appear
stretched or squeezed. We recommend that you select this
option for map views.
Scale the view to fit on a single 1 In the Page Mode box, select Single.
page 2 If you want to link the aspect ratio of the width and height,
select the Keep aspect ratio check box.
This option keeps the view from becoming distorted. If you
leave the check box cleared, the view is not scaled by the
same amount in both directions and might appear
stretched or squeezed. We recommend that you select this
option for map views.
The setting in the Fit mode box changes to Scale. Under
Output Settings, the values in the Width and Height boxes
indicate the dimensions of the view at the new scale (and
correspond to the dimensions of the paper required to print
the view).

Note If you change the scale in the Print Setup dialog box, the scale bar displayed on the view
is accurate because it is scaled along with the view. However, if you scale the view to print on a
certain size sheet of paper or single page, the scale in the legend will no longer be accurate
because the legend reflects the scale the view was created in. If you include a legend in the
view and you want the scale in the legend to be accurate, you must choose the As Is setting in
the Fit mode box and allow the view to be printed on multiple pages, if necessary, by choosing
Multiple in the Page mode box.

4 Click OK to carry out the command and close the dialog box.

1-24 Getting Started with Maps, Cross Sections, and Log Displays GOCAD® 2009.1 User Guide
 Part
III

Visualization
Example: Print a map This example shows how to print a map to a PostScript plotter in the Windows
to a plotter environment. The steps are similar if you are working in a Linux environment—only the
Print dialog box is different. The map in this example has a scale of 500 meters per inch,
and it includes a legend, color bar, and scale bar.

1 In the Map window, click Reset Zoom on the View toolbar to restore the view
to the original scale (in this case, 500 meters per inch).
2 On the File menu, click Print Preview to get a general idea of how big a piece of
paper is needed to put the map on one page. In this example, the preview shows that
four 8.5 × 11-inch pieces of paper are required to print the map.

Rock & Fluid Canvas™ 2009 | Epos™ 4.0 1.9 Previewing a 2D View and Preparing It for Printing 1-25
Paradigm™

3 Click Settings. In the Output settings area, check the width and height of the map.
These values account for the data, legend, color bar, and scale bar—everything but
the margins. In the Margins area, check the size of the margins.

In this example, the map, with margins, fits on a custom page size of about 17 × 17
inches.
4 In the Format box, select Custom, enter the custom values (in this case, 17) in the
Width and Height boxes, and then click OK. (Keep the default settings for the other
options: Page mode is Multiple and Fit mode is As Is.)

1-26 Getting Started with Maps, Cross Sections, and Log Displays GOCAD® 2009.1 User Guide
 Part
III

Visualization
The result in the Print Preview window is now as follows.

5 Click Print, and then select the PostScript plotter.

Rock & Fluid Canvas™ 2009 | Epos™ 4.0 1.9 Previewing a 2D View and Preparing It for Printing 1-27
Paradigm™

6 Click Preferences, and then click Advanced in the Printing Preferences dialog box
to reach the advanced settings.

7 In the Paper Size box, select PostScript Custom Page Size.

8 In the PostScript Custom Page Size Definition dialog box that opens, change the
width and height to 17 and then click OK.
9 Click OK twice more to accept changes and close the Advanced Options and
Printing Preferences dialog boxes, and then click Print on the Print dialog box.
The map prints to the plotter at the scale it was created in.

1-28 Getting Started with Maps, Cross Sections, and Log Displays GOCAD® 2009.1 User Guide
 Part
III

Visualization
1.10 Measuring Distance in the Active View
You can quickly measure the distance between two points in the active view by using the
Get Distance tool on the Camera Tools toolbar (in the 3D Viewer) or the Selection
toolbar (in a map or cross section view). For example, you can measure the length of the
reservoir, the thickness of a stratigraphic unit, or the thickness of a cell. Knowing the
thickness of a cell is useful during upscaling operations in the LGR and Upscaler
Workflow. You can measure the distance in any direction.

To measure distances 1 On the Camera Tools toolbar (for the 3D Viewer) or the Selection toolbar (for a map
or cross section view), click Get Distance (the pointer changes to a ), and
then do the following as necessary:
• In the 3D Viewer, drag a line between two points.
• In a map or cross section view, click the points that you want to measure the
distance between until you reach the last point, and then right-click the last point
to end the measurement. The cumulative distance appears on the status bar as
you click each point.
The Information pane opens, showing the coordinates of the points you select and
the cumulative distance in both 3D and 2D. The unit of measure is the areal unit
specified in the project.

Note The Map Distance is the 2D distance in the xy-plane.

2 To see the distance between another set of points, repeat step 1 as necessary.
3 When you finish measuring distances, do one of the following:

• To switch back to the default pointer , right-click in the active view.

• Click another tool on the Camera Tools toolbar (in the 3D Viewer) or Selection
toolbar (in a map or cross section view).
The Information pane closes.
Note If you customized your pointers in Windows or Linux, you may not see the same pointers
described in the documentation. These are the default pointers:

• Default pointer in the 3D Viewer (Viewer Movements):

• Default pointer in a map or cross section view (Pan View):

• Precise pointer (Pick):

• Move pointer:

• Link Select pointer (Rotate Slicer):

Rock & Fluid Canvas™ 2009 | Epos™ 4.0 1.10 Measuring Distance in the Active View 1-29
Paradigm™

1-30 Getting Started with Maps, Cross Sections, and Log Displays GOCAD® 2009.1 User Guide
 2
Visualizing Data in the
3D Viewer

In this chapter • "Getting Started in the 3D Viewer," • "Working with Color Maps to Change
page 2-2 the Appearance of Property Data,"
page 2-5
• "Opening Another 3D Viewer,"
page 2-4

2-1
Paradigm™

2.1 Getting Started in the 3D Viewer

The following are some quick operations to help you start working in the 3D Viewer:
• "To display an object," page 2-2
• "To display all objects," page 2-2
• "To see the name of an object in the 3D Viewer," page 2-2
• "To rotate the view in the 3D Viewer," page 2-2
• "To pan the view in the 3D Viewer," page 2-2
• "To zoom the view in the 3D Viewer," page 2-2
• "To open another 3D Viewer window," page 2-4
• "About measuring distance in the 3D Viewer," page 2-3
For more information about the Camera View and Camera Snapshot and Options
toolbars, see "Camera View Toolbar" on page 1-36 and "Camera Snapshot and Options
Toolbar" on page 1-38.

To display an object There are many ways to display objects, for example:

♦ In the Object Tree, select the check box next to the object you want to display.
– or –
In the Object Tree, drag the name of object you want to display into the 3D Viewer.
The object appears in the 3D Viewer. The Object Tree displays a check mark next to the
name of the object.

To display all objects ♦ Hold down the CTRL key and right-click an empty space in the 3D Viewer, and then
click Show All on the shortcut menu.
All the objects in your project appear in the 3D Viewer, and the Object Tree displays a
check mark next to the name of each object.

To see the name of ♦ Rest the pointer over an object. After a moment, a ToolTip appears with the name of
an object in the the object.
3D Viewer

To rotate the view ♦ Move the pointer into the 3D Viewer and drag in any direction to rotate around a
in the 3D Viewer point in the center of the view.

To pan the view in ♦ Move the pointer into the 3D Viewer and, using the middle mouse button, drag in
the 3D Viewer any direction to shift the view in that direction.

To zoom the view in ♦ Move the pointer into the 3D Viewer and, using the right mouse button, drag:
the 3D Viewer
• Toward the top of the window to decrease the size of objects in the view
(zoom out).
• Toward the bottom of the window to increase size of objects in the view
(zoom in).

2-2 Visualizing Data in the 3D Viewer GOCAD® 2009.1 User Guide

 Part
III

Visualization
About measuring
You can use the Get Distances tool on the Camera Tools toolbar to measure the
distance in the
distance between two points in both 2D and 3D. The tool operates the same way in 2D
3D Viewer
and 3D views. For more information, see "Measuring Distance in the Active View" on
page 1-29.

Rock & Fluid Canvas™ 2009 | Epos™ 4.0 2.1 Getting Started in the 3D Viewer 2-3
Paradigm™

2.2 Opening Another 3D Viewer

You can open a 3D Viewer in a separate window.
Note For UNIX, if you have two monitors, you can display a second 3D Viewer window on the
second monitor by clicking Use Second Screen on the Windows menu.

To open another ♦ On the View menu, click New 3D Viewer to open a 3D Viewer in a separate
3D Viewer window window.

2-4 Visualizing Data in the 3D Viewer GOCAD® 2009.1 User Guide

 Part
III

Visualization
2.3 Working with Color Maps to Change the
Appearance of Property Data
GOCAD translates continuous property data values into colors in the 3D Viewer by using
color maps stored in the project. The color map assigned to a property helps you visualize
data distributions. Each color represents a specific property data value.
Color maps apply only to properties that have continuous data values such as porosity or
permeability. To change the appearance of properties that have discrete values, you need
to use Classifications (for information, see "Defining Classifications" on page 10-2).
When you display a continuous property in the 3D Viewer, you can use one of many
predefined color maps. Or, you can create or import custom color maps and work in the
Colormap Editor to make changes. If you create a custom color map, you can select your
own colors and adjust the gradient and transparency for data values.
By changing the colors and transparency, you can refine how GOCAD represents data in
the 3D Viewer. For example, if you display a property for a Voxet object, you may want to:
• Hide the highest and lowest data values (clipping extreme highs and lows).
• Change the color for specific property values to make them clearly identifiable.
• Adjust the transparency to highlight geologic bodies.
• Enhance the representation of maximums and minimums (for example, to clarify
seismic amplitude or areas of maximum porosity).

Figure 2–1 Porosity

shown with Rainbow
color map

You can find a list of predefined and custom color maps in the Object Tree, under
Resources, Colormaps.

Rock & Fluid Canvas™ 2009 | Epos™ 4.0 2.3 Working with Color Maps to Change the Appearance of Property Data 2-5
Paradigm™

For information about how to work with color maps, see:

• "Quick Tour of the Colormap Editor," page 2-6
• "Creating Color Maps and Accessing the Colormap Editor," page 2-7
• "Assigning a Color Map to a Property," page 2-10
• "Changing the Distribution Colors," page 2-10
• "Changing the Color Scale," page 2-11
• "Adjusting the Gradient with Anchors," page 2-14
• "Adjusting Transparency," page 2-16
• "Managing Color Maps," page 2-18

2.3.1 Quick Tour of the Colormap Editor

When you open the Colormap Editor, you have access to several tools to help you
customize color maps.

z1
z2

z8

z 2a z 9

z 2b
z 10

z11

z3
z 4

z5
z 5

z6

z 7

z1 Colormap. Specifies the name of the selected color map. The list includes all of
the predefined maps and any user-defined maps in the project.

z2 Histogram pane. Depending on how you access the Colormap Editor, you may
see the distribution of the property data values (if you don’t see this pane, see
"To access the color map for an object property," page 2-9). The histogram pane
includes:
• Transparency curve (2a). A manually-drawn curve across the data
distribution that defines the degree of transparency for each data value.

2-6 Visualizing Data in the 3D Viewer GOCAD® 2009.1 User Guide

 Part
III

Visualization
• Bins (2b). Each bin represents a data value. You can you increase or decrease
the number of bins.

z
3 Color scale. Contains the data value scale and anchors to adjust the gradient.

z
4 Anchor. By adding an anchor, you can assign a color to a specific data value. You
can drag the anchor left or right to adjust the gradient.

z
5 Base anchors. Base anchors represents the highest and lowest data values (also
called the high and low clips).

z
6 Color distribution area. Displays the full range of colors in the color map that
can represent data values. You can change the color for a data value by selecting
it and using the tools on the right.

z
7 Highlighted color. Shows the color selected in the color map. Clicking the color
expands a palette for you to choose another color to replace the definition in the
color map.

z
8 Color. Specifies the color selected in the color map. Clicking the color expands a
palette for you to choose another color to replace the definition in the color map.

z
9 Position. Indicates the location of the selected anchor on the color scale. You
can change the position of an anchor by increasing or decreasing the value.

z
10 Editing tools. Add, remove, split, or join anchors in the color scale. You can also
undo or redo commands. If you select a range of colors, these tools change so
that you can interpolate, complement, and invert colors (see Figure 2–4).

z
11 Immediate Apply. If selected, GOCAD applies your changes to the color map in
the 3D Viewer as you make them.

2.3.2 Creating Color Maps and Accessing the

Colormap Editor
You can create custom color maps and then edit them by using the Colormap Editor.
For example, you can:
• Replace a color for a specific data value by clicking an anchor and selecting another
color.
• Specify the colors to map to a range of values.

• Accentuate or de-emphasize data values by decreasing or increasing transparency for

those values.
You can create a custom color map by editing one of the predefined color maps or by
creating your own color map.
For information about accessing the Colormap Editor and creating your own color maps,
see:
• "To create a color map," page 2-8
• "To edit a color map," page 2-9
• "To access the color map for an object property," page 2-9

Rock & Fluid Canvas™ 2009 | Epos™ 4.0 2.3 Working with Color Maps to Change the Appearance of Property Data 2-7
Paradigm™

To create a color map 1 In the Object Tree, under Resources, right-click Colormaps, and then click New
Colormap to open the dialog box.

2 In the Name box, type a name for the color map. The name should follow the rules
described in Part I: Getting Started, "Naming Objects" on page 3-7.
3 Do one of the following, depending on the type of color map that you want to
create:
• To create a color map with no predefined settings, select Empty.

• To create a color map using the settings from an existing color map, select Copy
from colormap, and then select a color map in the box.
• To create a color map using the settings from a classification, select Copy from
classification and select a classification in the box. For more information about
classifications, see Part IV: Foundation Modeling , "Defining Classifications" on
page 10-2.

Figure 2–2 Colormap

Editor opened from the
Resources list

4 Edit the color map settings as necessary. For information, see:

• "Changing the Distribution Colors," page 2-10
• "Changing the Color Scale," page 2-11
• "Adjusting the Gradient with Anchors," page 2-14
• "Adjusting Transparency," page 2-16
5 Click OK to carry out the command and close the dialog box, or click Apply to carry
out the command and leave the dialog box open.

2-8 Visualizing Data in the 3D Viewer GOCAD® 2009.1 User Guide

 Part
III

Visualization
To edit a color map ♦ In the Object Tree, expand Resources, expand Colormaps, right-click the name of a
color map, and then click Edit to open the Colormap Editor (see Figure 2–2).
Notes
• If you edit a predefined color map, GOCAD retains the original map and creates another
one that you can edit, appending _n to the end of the name. For example if you edit the
rainbow color map and click Apply, GOCAD creates the color map rainbow_01. You can
then select the new color map in the Colormap Editor or from the Object Tree, under
Resources, Colormaps.
• You cannot edit a color map if the project is locked. You must first delete the lock and then
save the project in order to edit the color map. For more information, see Part I: Getting
Started, "Deleting a Lock File to Save a Project" on page 2-8.

To access the color ♦ In the Object Tree, expand the object category and the name of the object that
map for an object contains the property that you want to edit, select the name of the property, and then
property
click Edit Colormap on the Secondary Attribute toolbar.

– or –
Do the following:
a Right-click the name of the property in the Object Tree, and then click Attributes
to access the attributes for the property.
b In the Attributes dialog box, click Edit to open the Colormap Editor.
For example, see Figure 2–3.

Figure 2–3 Colormap

Editor with the histogram
pane

Rock & Fluid Canvas™ 2009 | Epos™ 4.0 2.3 Working with Color Maps to Change the Appearance of Property Data 2-9
Paradigm™

2.3.3 Assigning a Color Map to a Property

To assign a color map ♦ In the Object Tree, select the property, and then, on the Secondary Attribute
to a property toolbar, select the color map in the Colormap box.

2.3.4 Changing the Distribution Colors

You can change a single color or change several colors in a single step by selecting a
range of colors. You can then interpolate the range of colors to smoothly blend the
transition between the first and last colors.
Tip The color distribution For information about changing colors, see:
area can contain 2–256
colors. For more • "To change a single color in the color distribution area," page 2-10
information, see "To specify • "To change a range of colors," page 2-10
the number of colors,"
page 2-13.
• "To complement a range of colors," page 2-10
• "To invert a range of colors," page 2-10
• "To interpolate a range of colors," page 2-11

To change a single 1 Open the color map that you want to edit in the Colormap Editor (for information see
color in the color "Creating Color Maps and Accessing the Colormap Editor" on page 2-7).
distribution area 2 Select a color box.
3 Right-click or click the color box under Selection and select a color.

To change a range of 1 Open the color map that you want to edit in the Colormap Editor (for information see
colors "Creating Color Maps and Accessing the Colormap Editor" on page 2-7).
2 Click a color and drag the mouse to select several colors.
3 Right-click and select a color.
4 Click OK to carry out the command and close the dialog box, or click Apply to carry
out the command and leave the dialog box open.

To complement a 1 Open the color map that you want to edit in the Colormap Editor (for information see
range of colors "Creating Color Maps and Accessing the Colormap Editor" on page 2-7).
2 Click a color and drag the mouse in the color distribution area to select several colors.

3 Under Editing, click .

4 Click OK to carry out the command and close the dialog box, or click Apply to carry
out the command and leave the dialog box open.

To invert a range of 1 Open the color map that you want to edit in the Colormap Editor (for information see
colors "Creating Color Maps and Accessing the Colormap Editor" on page 2-7).
2 Click a color and drag the mouse in the color distribution area to select several colors.

3 Under Editing, click .

4 Click OK to carry out the command and close the dialog box, or click Apply to carry
out the command and leave the dialog box open.

2-10 Visualizing Data in the 3D Viewer GOCAD® 2009.1 User Guide

 Part
III

Visualization
To interpolate a range 1 Open the color map that you want to edit in the Colormap Editor (for information see
of colors "Creating Color Maps and Accessing the Colormap Editor" on page 2-7).
2 Click the color in the color distribution area and drag the mouse to select several
colors. This action makes the interpolation tools appear under Editing (see
Figure 2–4).

3 Under Editing, click .

4 Click OK to carry out the command and close the dialog box, or click Apply to carry
out the command and leave the dialog box open.

Tip Click to undo or

redo your changes.

Figure 2–4 Interpolating

colors

2.3.5 Changing the Color Scale

You can change how the color scale appears so that you have the colors and settings that
you want to use for custom color maps. The Colormap Editor shows the attributes of the
color map that is currently selected in the Colormap box (near the top of the window).
You can do the following:
• Reverse the colors to switch all the colors from left to right in the color scale. In other
words, the minimum color becomes the maximum color and vice-versa.
• Complement the colors to replace each color with its RGB (red-green-blue)
counterpart. For example, red will be replaced by cyan (the RGB complementary
color).
• Show or hide null data values. If you show null data values, you can specify the color.

• Specify the colors and values for the low and high clips. The low clip is the lower limit
of the property value in the color scale. If the low clip value is greater than the lowest
value of your data set, the data values that fall below the clip-value use the low-end
color—in other words, the values are clipped. The high clip is the upper limit of the

Rock & Fluid Canvas™ 2009 | Epos™ 4.0 2.3 Working with Color Maps to Change the Appearance of Property Data 2-11
Paradigm™

property value for the color scale. If the high clip value is smaller than the highest
value of your data set, these data values are clipped and will be appear in the high-
end color.
• Specify how many colors appear in the color distribution area.

• Specify the spacing or distribution of the selected colors by using anchors (see
"Adjusting the Gradient with Anchors," page 2-14).
For information about editing the color scale, see:
• "To set the low and high clip property range," page 2-12
• "To expand or reduce the size of the color scale," page 2-12
• "To specify the number of colors," page 2-13
• "To reverse the colors," page 2-13
• "To complement the colors," page 2-13
• "To hide or show null data values," page 2-13
• "To automatically set the colors based on high and low clips," page 2-13.
The histogram pane must be showing to perform all of these procedures (for more
information, see "To access the color map for an object property," page 2-9).

To set the low and 1 Open the color map for the property that you want to edit in the Colormap Editor (for
high clip property information see "Creating Color Maps and Accessing the Colormap Editor" on
range page 2-7).
2 Click the low or high clip anchor and drag it to a new position in the scale.
– or –
Do the following:
a Right-click in the color scale and click Edit property range to open the dialog
box.

b Specify the Minimum and Maximum ranges for the low and high clip anchors.
c Click OK to close the dialog box.
Note Setting the low and high clip does not change the histogram minimum and maximum
settings.

To expand or reduce 1 Open the color map for the property that you want to edit in the Colormap Editor (for
the size of the color information see "Creating Color Maps and Accessing the Colormap Editor" on
scale page 2-7).
2 Hold the SHIFT key down and drag the scale left or right. To return to the original
scale, double click in the color scale.
Note Adjusting the scale this way does not change the histogram minimum and maximum range
values.

2-12 Visualizing Data in the 3D Viewer GOCAD® 2009.1 User Guide

 Part
III

Visualization
To specify the number 1 Open the color map for the property that you want to edit in the Colormap Editor (for
of colors information see "Creating Color Maps and Accessing the Colormap Editor" on
page 2-7).
2 Right-click in the color scale, click Number of colors, and select the number of
colors from the list.
Note A color map by default has 256 colors or gradations. The smallest size you can specify is
4 and the maximum is 256. You must specify at least 256 colors to see anchors in the color
scale (see "Adjusting the Gradient with Anchors" on page 2-14).

To reverse the colors 1 Open the color map for the property that you want to edit in the Colormap Editor (for
information see "Creating Color Maps and Accessing the Colormap Editor" on
page 2-7).
2 Right-click in the color scale and click Reverse color map. The maximum color
becomes the minimum color and vice-versa.

To complement the 1 Open the color map for the property that you want to edit in the Colormap Editor (for
colors information see "Creating Color Maps and Accessing the Colormap Editor" on
page 2-7).
2 Right-click in the color scale and click Complement color map. The colors are
replaced by their complementary colors in the color map. For example, red is replaced
by cyan (light blue).

To hide or show null 1 Open the color map for the property that you want to edit in the Colormap Editor (for
data values information see "Creating Color Maps and Accessing the Colormap Editor" on
page 2-7).
2 To hide null data values in the color map, right-click in the color scale and click Use
no data value to place a check mark beside the command.
– or –

To have a color represent null data values:

a Right-click in the color scale and click Use no data value to remove the check
mark. A blank color box is added to the end of the color distribution area.
b Right-click the color box at the end of the color distribution area and select a
color. Null data values are now represented by this color.
Note If the color map has 256 colors and this option is on, one color will be used for the
no data value and the number of colors is reduced to 255.

To automatically set 1 Open the color map for the property that you want to edit in the Colormap Editor (for
the colors based on information see "Creating Color Maps and Accessing the Colormap Editor" on
high and low clips page 2-7).
2 Right-click in the color scale and click Recompute clip values. GOCAD analyzes the
low and high clip data values to automatically set the colors.

Rock & Fluid Canvas™ 2009 | Epos™ 4.0 2.3 Working with Color Maps to Change the Appearance of Property Data 2-13
Paradigm™

2.3.6 Adjusting the Gradient with Anchors

The color of the anchor defines the color of the data value in the color map. To adjust the
gradient of a color map, you can add, move, and edit the colors of the anchors in the
Colormap Editor color scale. There must be at least 256 colors in the color distribution
area to see the anchors (for more information, see "To specify the number of colors" on
page 2-13).
Tip If you do not see the The colors that represent the data are linearly interpolated between the two base
low and high clip anchors, anchors. The two base anchors are called the low and high clip anchors and they are
right-click in the color scale
positioned at the highest and lowest data values of the color scale. You can then add as
and click Recompute clip
values.
many anchors as you want between them to adjust the gradient. The base anchors cannot
be deleted or moved. However, you can drag them left or right to enlarge or shrink the
scale.
Changing the color of anchors subsequently changes the colors of the data value that it
represents. For example, if you change the color of the anchor at the 100 data point, all
colors in the color map will be modified accordingly to adjust for the gradient.
You can also split anchors. Split anchors achieve the same results as placing two anchors
very close to each other.

Figure 2–5 Color scale

and anchors

Base anchor - Base anchor -

Low clip Anchor Split anchor Data point High clip

For information about working with anchors to adjust the gradient, see:
• "To add new anchors and adjust the gradient," page 2-14
• "To split an anchor," page 2-15
• "To change the color of an anchor," page 2-15
• "To change the colors of multiple anchors," page 2-15
• "To delete an anchor," page 2-15

To add new anchors 1 Open the color map for the property that you want to edit in the Colormap Editor (for
and adjust the information see "Creating Color Maps and Accessing the Colormap Editor" on
gradient page 2-7).
2 If you do not see the anchor buttons under Editing, click an anchor or click anywhere
in the color scale.

3 Under Editing, click . (If you want to add more than one anchor, hold down the
CTRL key.)

4 Drag the pointer over the color scale. The pointer changes to a .
5 Click in the scale where you want to place the anchor. The new anchor appears and is
selected (if you added more than one, the last one you added is selected).
Tip Hold down the SHIFT 6 Select an anchor and do one of the following to adjust the gradient:
key to select all anchors
between two anchors. Hold • Drag the anchor horizontally along the color scale
down the CTRL key to select
several different anchors. • Specify a value in the Position box (see item 9 on page 2-7).

2-14 Visualizing Data in the 3D Viewer GOCAD® 2009.1 User Guide

 Part
III

Visualization
• Use the left or right arrow buttons to move the anchor horizontally along the
color scale.
7 Click OK to carry out the command and close the dialog box, or click Apply to
carry out the command and leave the dialog box open.

To split an anchor 1 Open the color map for the property that you want to edit in the Colormap Editor (for
information see "Creating Color Maps and Accessing the Colormap Editor" on
page 2-7).

2 Select the anchor and click . To put the anchor back to its original state, click the
button again.
3 To assign colors to the split anchor, do one of the following:
• Right-click the side you want to assign a color and select a color.

• Select the split anchor and under Selection, click the left and right color boxes to
select a color.

To change the color of 1 Open the color map for the property that you want to edit in the Colormap Editor (for
an anchor information see "Creating Color Maps and Accessing the Colormap Editor" on
page 2-7).
2 Complete one of these steps:
• Right-click the anchor and select a color. To assign colors to a split anchor, see
"To split an anchor" on page 2-15.
• Select the anchor, click the color button under Selection and select a color.

• Drag the anchor to the color you want on the color scale.

To change the colors 1 Open the color map for the property that you want to edit in the Colormap Editor (for
of multiple anchors information see "Creating Color Maps and Accessing the Colormap Editor" on
page 2-7).
2 Hold down the CTRL key and select two or more anchors in the color scale.
3 Right-click in the color scale and select a color.

To delete an anchor ♦ Select one or more anchors in the scale and click .

Rock & Fluid Canvas™ 2009 | Epos™ 4.0 2.3 Working with Color Maps to Change the Appearance of Property Data 2-15
Paradigm™

2.3.7 Adjusting Transparency

You can increase or decrease the transparency of a color by drawing a transparency curve
in the histogram pane. At each point in the color scale, the vertical position of the curve
determines the transparency of the color. For example, the higher the curve is on the
vertical scale, the more visible the color (or data value) will be in the 3D Viewer.
Conversely, The lower the curve is on the vertical scale, the more transparent the color will
be in the 3D Viewer.
The transparency curve is a yellow line that you draw by clicking in the histogram to
activate the drawing tool and then you drag the tool across the pane (see Figure 2–6).
You can draw the curve using freehand or make cutoff or constant curves by holding
down the CTRL and ALT keys respectively while drawing the curve.
You must open the Colormap Editor by accessing it from the property in the Object Tree
to see the histogram pane. For more information, see "To access the color map for an
object property" on page 2-9.

Figure 2–6 Histogram

and transparency curve

For information about drawing transparency curves, see:

• "To draw the transparency curve," page 2-17
• "To adjust the vertical and horizontal scales," page 2-17
• "To set the vertical axis," page 2-17
• "To set the horizontal axis," page 2-17
• "To return transparency to the original settings," page 2-18
• "To add or remove bins," page 2-18
• "To hide the values below the low clip," page 2-18
• "To hide the values above the high clip," page 2-18

2-16 Visualizing Data in the 3D Viewer GOCAD® 2009.1 User Guide

 Part
III

Visualization
To draw the 1 Select the property for which you want to edit the color map and open the color map
transparency curve in the Colormap Editor (for information, see "To access the color map for an object
property" on page 2-9).
2 In the histogram pane, click where you want to start drawing and drag within the
pane. You can draw the curve manually (freehand) or do the following:
• To make a cutoff (snap to the top or bottom of the scale), hold down the CTRL
key while you draw the curve. If the pen is below the midpoint, the curve snaps
to the bottom and if it is above the midpoint, the curve snaps to the top.
• To make a constant (a straight line between data points), hold down the ALT key
and drag the pointer.

To adjust the vertical 1 Select the property for which you want to edit the color map and open the color map
and horizontal scales in the Colormap Editor (for information, see "To access the color map for an object
property" on page 2-9).
2 Left click in the vertical or horizontal axis and drag the scale in either direction.

To set the vertical axis 1 Select the property for which you want to edit the color map and open the color map
in the Colormap Editor (for information, see "To access the color map for an object
property" on page 2-9).
2 Right-click the vertical axis, and then click Vertical axis range to open the dialog
box.

3 Type the value in the Maximum box and click OK.

Note The minimum is always set to zero; modifications in the Minimum box are ignored.

4 To reset the minimum and maximum range to stretch or squeeze the low and high
clip, right-click the horizontal axis and click Reset horizontal axis.

To set the horizontal 1 Select the property for which you want to edit the color map and open the color map
axis in the Colormap Editor (for information, see "To access the color map for an object
property" on page 2-9).
2 Right-click the horizontal axis and click Horizontal axis range to open the dialog
box.

3 Type the value in the Minimum and Maximum boxes to set the axis range and click
OK.

Rock & Fluid Canvas™ 2009 | Epos™ 4.0 2.3 Working with Color Maps to Change the Appearance of Property Data 2-17
Paradigm™

4 To choose type of scale for the horizontal axis, right-click the horizontal axis and click
Horizontal scale Function and click linear, log10, or sqrt.
5 To put the minimum and maximum range to the original setting, click Reset
horizontal axis.

To return 1 Select the property for which you want to edit the color map and open the color map
transparency to the in the Colormap Editor (for information, see "To access the color map for an object
original settings property" on page 2-9).
2 Right-click in the histogram pane and click Reset transparency.

To add or remove bins 1 Select the property for which you want to edit the color map and open the color map
in the Colormap Editor (for information, see "To access the color map for an object
property" on page 2-9).
2 Right-click in the histogram pane, click Number of bins, and then select a number
from 2 to 300. The bins represent the data values for each color.

To hide the values 1 Select the property for which you want to edit the color map and open the color map
below the low clip in the Colormap Editor (for information, see "To access the color map for an object
property" on page 2-9).
2 Right-click in the histogram pane and click Make low clip transparent. The data
values that have property values that are equal to or less than the low clip value are
hidden when you display the property in the 3D Viewer.

To hide the values 1 Select the property for which you want to edit the color map and open the color map
above the high clip in the Colormap Editor (for information, see "To access the color map for an object
property" on page 2-9).
2 Right-click in the histogram pane and click Make high clip transparent. The data
values that have property values that are equal to or greater than the high clip value
are hidden when you display the property in the 3D Viewer.

2.3.8 Managing Color Maps

You can manage custom and predefined GOCAD color maps from the Object Tree. For
example, you can reuse a color map by saving it to a file and then loading it into another
project. You can also rename custom color maps, however, you cannot rename the
predefined GOCAD color maps.
For information about creating a colormap, see "To create a color map" on page 2-8.
For information about managing existing color maps, see:
• "To save a color map to a file," page 2-18
• "To load a color map," page 2-19
• "To import a color map," page 2-19
• "To delete a custom color map," page 2-19
• "To rename a custom color map," page 2-19

To save a color map 1 In the Object Tree, under Resources, expand Colormaps, right-click the name of the
to a file color map that you want to save, and then click Save to open the dialog box.
2 Browse to the folder where you want to save the color map file, and then click Save.

2-18 Visualizing Data in the 3D Viewer GOCAD® 2009.1 User Guide

 Part
III

Visualization
GOCAD saves the file with the file name extension, .cmap.
You can load the color map that you saved into a project at any time—see "To load a
color map" on page 2-19.

To load a color map 1 In the Object Tree, under Resources, right-click Colormaps, and then click Load
Colormap to open the dialog box.
2 Browse to the folder and select one or more color map files with the .cmap file name
extension.
GOCAD loads the file, and the name of the color map appears in the Colormap list in the
Object Tree.
If a color map with the same name already exists in the project, GOCAD appends _n
to the end of the name. For example, MyColormap_0.

To import a color map ♦ In the Object Tree, under Resources, right-click Colormaps, and then under Import
from, click the source format that you want to import to open the dialog box.
For more information about how to complete the importing process, see one of the
following topics, depending on the type of file you want to import:
• Temis3D. See Part II: Data Import and Export, "To import a Temis3D Colormap" on
page 1-10.
• SeisWorks or MPath PAR. See Part II: Data Import and Export , "Basic procedure for
importing" on page 1-6.

To delete a custom ♦ In the Object Tree, under Resources, right-click the name of the color map that you
color map want to delete, and then click Delete.
– or –
In the Object Tree, under Resources, click the name of the color map that you want
to delete, and then press the DELETE key.
Note You cannot delete the predefined GOCAD color maps.

To rename a custom 1 In the Object Tree, under Resources, right-click the name of the color map that you
color map want to rename, and then click Rename to open the dialog box.
2 In the New name box, type a name.
3 Click OK to carry out the command and close the dialog box, or click Apply to carry
out the command and leave the dialog box open.

Rock & Fluid Canvas™ 2009 | Epos™ 4.0 2.3 Working with Color Maps to Change the Appearance of Property Data 2-19
Paradigm™

2-20 Visualizing Data in the 3D Viewer GOCAD® 2009.1 User Guide

 3
Visualizing Data in
Log Displays

In this chapter • "Quick Tour of the Log Display • "Working with Logs in Tracks,"
Window," page 3-2 page 3-39
• "Components of a Log Display," • "Working with Well Markers in
page 3-5 Tracks," page 3-55
• "Creating a Log Display," page 3-8 • "Changing the Log Display Layout,"
page 3-57
• "Opening an Existing Log Display
View," page 3-14 • "Exporting Logs to a CSV File,"
page 3-60
• "Editing Log Display View Settings,"
page 3-15 • "Creating and Working with Pillar
Templates," page 3-61
• "Working with Tracks," page 3-18

Overview These topics describe the components of a log display view and how to create and work
with them in Paradigm™ GOCAD® 2009.

3-1
Paradigm™

3.1 Quick Tour of the Log Display Window

When you create a log display view, the Log Display window opens. Figure 3–1 shows
an example.

Figure 3–1 Log Display window

z 1

z 2
z 5

z 3
z 4
z 6

z 7

z 8

z 9

z1 Menu bar. You can access commands for manipulating the view, undoing and
redoing operations, editing the legend, exporting, printing, saving, copying,
editing stratigraphy, and getting help. For more information about these
commands, see:
• "Exporting as a Graphics File, Printing, Saving, and Copying a 2D View,"
page 1-15
• "Displaying Legends, Color Bars, and Scale Bars in a 2D View," page 1-17
• "Building and Working with Stratigraphic Columns," page 10-15

z2 Log Display toolbar. You can change the vertical scale (depth domain) for
visualizing logs, export logs to a comma-separated value (CSV) file, and color fill
between correlation lines. For more information about these operations, see:
• "Changing the Log Display Layout," page 3-57
• "Exporting Logs to a CSV File," page 3-60
• "Filling a Structural Interpretation with Solid Painting," page 5-38

z3 Task Pane. You can access the Objects tab and the Pillar Templates tab, which
list all of the items that you can work with in the log display view including
pillars, tracks, well data such as logs and markers, and templates. The Objects
tab in this view works in a similar manner to the Object Tree in the
GOCAD window. From this tab, you can show and hide items in the log display
view and access commands for the objects and data in the list.

3-2 Visualizing Data in Log Displays GOCAD® 2009.1 User Guide

 Part
III

Visualization
By using the Pillar Templates tab, you can create and work with pillar templates.
For more information, see:
• Part I: Getting Started, "Working in the Task Pane," page 1-20
• "Creating and Working with Pillar Templates," page 3-61

z 4 View. This area is where you can display and manipulate the 2D log display view.
Measurements along the vertical axis (z) indicate time or depth.
For more information, see "Components of a Log Display" on page 3-5.

z 5 Selection toolbar. You can change the action of the pointer to either pan the
view vertically (Pan View ) or select objects (Select Objects ).

z 6 View toolbar. You can change the view by zooming. You can also access the
view settings so that you can change the scale and dimensions of the view. For
more information, see "Setting the Display in 2D Windows" on page 1-8 and
"Editing Log Display View Settings" on page 3-15.

z 7 File toolbar. You can save the log display view to a CGM, bitmap, or GIF file;
copy the view to the clipboard; and print the view. For more information, see
"Exporting as a Graphics File, Printing, Saving, and Copying a 2D View" on
page 1-15.

z 8 Options toolbar. You can show the legend and scale in the log display view. For
more information, see "Setting Display Options in a 2D View" on page 1-9.

z 9 Attribute toolbar. Before you select an object on the Objects tab or in the view,
the Attribute toolbar displays "Nothing Selected." The Attribute toolbar in this
view works the same way as the one in the GOCAD window. When you select an
object, the Attribute toolbar displays the tools that are specific to the type of
object selected.
For more information about object attributes and the attribute toolbars, see:
• Part I: Getting Started, "Attribute Manager (Attributes Tab)," page 1-32
• Part I: Getting Started, "Attribute Toolbars," page 1-43

z10 Other toolbars (not shown). Some toolbars are initially hidden, and you may
see additional toolbars depending on the modules loaded with the project. For
information, see Part I: Getting Started "Choosing Modules for a Project" on
page 1-8.
• Well Curves toolbar. You can edit a well curve (log curve) in a log track by
using the pointer. For more information, see Part IV: Foundation Modeling,
"Editing a Well Log in a Cross Section or Log Display" on page 7-10.
• Feature Correlation toolbar. You can define features, digitize correlation
lines, and "flatten" the display using a reference marker as a datum line. For
more information, see Part VII: Geologic Interpretation, "Feature Correlation
Toolbar for Log Display Views" on page 2-23.

Rock & Fluid Canvas™ 2009 | Epos™ 4.0 3.1 Quick Tour of the Log Display Window 3-3
Paradigm™

• Well Picks toolbar. If you load the Well Correlation and Stratigraphic
Analysis module, you can add and reposition markers for one or more wells,
correlate logs, and copy markers. For more information, see Part VII:
Geologic Interpretation, "Adding and Editing Markers by Using the Well
Picks Toolbar" on page 2-12.
• Well Intervals toolbar. You can interpret facies, edit facies boundaries, and
move facies intervals. For more information, see Part VII: Geologic
Interpretation, "Interpreting and Editing Facies" on page 2-18.
• Time-Depth Correlation Toolbar. If you load the Velocity Modeling and
Time Depth Conversion module, you can quickly perform velocity
conversions. For more information, see Part VI: Velocity Modeling
"Performing Velocity Conversions" on page 4-1.

3-4 Visualizing Data in Log Displays GOCAD® 2009.1 User Guide

 Part
III

Visualization
3.2 Components of a Log Display
Pillar For each well that you add to a log display view there is a corresponding pillar for which
you can display well data.

Tracks You can display several types of data on log display views. You display each data type in a
specific type of track: a scale track, a log track, an interval track, a stratigraphy track, or a
chronostratigraphy track . And, if you have more than one pillar in a log display view, you
can display correlation tracks between the pillars.
Scale track. A scale track displays the vertical scale of the well. The scale can be in
measured depth or in true vertical depth subsea (TVDSS) (two-way traveltime if your
log display view is in time rather than depth).
Log track. A log track displays any kind of well log (or property) as a segmented line on
top of a gridded, vertical display.
Interval track. An interval track displays any discrete property or log (such as lithology or
facies). The color codes and patterns defined in the classification of the property
differentiate discrete values.
Stratigraphy track. A stratigraphy track displays the stratigraphic column associated
with a well.
Chronostratigraphy track. A chronostratigraphy track displays the geologic time, which
is based on well marker age.
Correlation tracks. A correlation track displays straight correlation lines between two
pillars that have the same well marker.
Figure 3–2 shows an example of tracks on a pillar. Figure 3–3 shows an example of a
correlation track between two pillars.

WTD (Well Total The Well Total Depth (WTD) marker is the lowest extremity of the well. The WTD is
Depth) marker identified by a thick black line at the bottom of a track.

Rock & Fluid Canvas™ 2009 | Epos™ 4.0 3.2 Components of a Log Display 3-5
Paradigm™

Figure 3–2 Tracks on a Well name

log display view
Scale Interval
track track

Log track

3-6 Visualizing Data in Log Displays GOCAD® 2009.1 User Guide

 Part
III

Visualization
Figure 3–3 Correlation Correlation track Lithostratigraphic track
track and
chronostratigraphy tracks

Marker

Correlation
line

Rock & Fluid Canvas™ 2009 | Epos™ 4.0 3.2 Components of a Log Display 3-7
Paradigm™

3.3 Creating a Log Display

You can create log display views in several ways: by selecting wells from a list of the wells
in the project and specifying view settings, by using a shortcut method available from any
well log in the Object Tree or a log track, or by picking wells in the 3D Viewer or the Map
window. If you want to correlate data from wells or compare multiple wells, you can do
this by creating a log display view with multiple wells. If you want to create a log display
view for a single well—to perform a quality check for a well, for example—you can use
the shortcut method.
Note Performing well correlation requires the Well Correlation and Stratigraphic Analysis module.

For information, see:

• "To create a log display view by selecting wells and view settings," page 3-8
• "To create a log display view from a well log," page 3-12
• "To create a log display view by picking wells in the 3D Viewer," page 3-12
• "To create a log display view by picking wells in the Map window," page 3-12
• "To create a log display view from a cross section view," page 3-13
• "To create a log display view from a log display view property," page 3-13

To create a log display 1 In the Object Tree, right-click the Log Display category, and then click From Wells to
view by selecting open the dialog box.
wells and view
settings

2 In the Log Display name box, type a name for the log display view. The name must
follow the rules in "Naming Objects" on page 3-7.
3 In Log Display domain, select either Depth or Time. If you select Time, the wells
you select in the next step must be in the time domain.

3-8 Visualizing Data in Log Displays GOCAD® 2009.1 User Guide

 Part
III

Visualization
4 In the Add Wells box, enter the names of the wells, and then click to add the

wells. Wells in Groups are eligible. You can also click and select the wells in the
3D Viewer.
For each well you select, GOCAD, adds a pillar to the log display view. And, if you
selected the wells from the 3D Viewer the pillars appear in the order that you selected
them.

The table lists each well you add.

Repeat this step as necessary to add more wells.
5 If you want to remove wells or change the order of wells in the log display view, do
the following as necessary.

To Do this
Change the order of wells In the table, click the number to the left of the well that you want to
in the log display view move (hold SHIFT to select multiple wells), and then click Move
Selected Row or Move Selected Row one or more times
as necessary.
Remove one or more wells Select one or more wells in the table (hold SHIFT or CTRL to select
from the log display view
multiple wells), and then click Remove Selected Rows .

6 If you want to specify the true-stratigraphic thickness (TST), true-vertical thickness

(TVT), or two-way time (TWT) conversion curve for the well logs for a well, double-
click in the TST Curve, TVT Curve, or TWT Curve box for the well, and then select
the curve.
7 If you want to use a predefined template to set up the initial view, do the following:

a Enter the name of the template in the Pillar Template box, or click to load
one that you previously saved as a file.
b Indicate how you want to apply the template by clicking either:
• Reference. Future changes to the template automatically apply to all pillars.
• Copy. Changes that you make to a pillar do not apply to the other pillars.
Changes to a pillar apply only to that pillar.
Note After you create the log display view, you can change this setting by reverting to
individual settings. For more information, see "To revert to individual pillar settings" on
page 3-70.

For more information about templates, see "Creating and Working with Pillar
Templates" on page 3-61.
8 In the Vertical space box, select the domain (vertical scale) to display the logs.
This setting defines the vertical axis and its limit as:

Rock & Fluid Canvas™ 2009 | Epos™ 4.0 3.3 Creating a Log Display 3-9
Paradigm™

• MD. Measured depth (the preselected option).

• TVDSS. True-vertical depth subsea.

• TWT. Two-way time.

• TST. True-stratigraphic thickness.

• TVT. True-vertical thickness.
The domain that you select appears on the vertical scales on both the left and right
sides in the log display view.
Note Later, you can change this setting in the Log Display Attributes dialog box or from the
Log Display toolbar. For more information, see "Changing the Log Display Layout" on
page 3-57 and "Quick Tour of the Log Display Window" on page 3-2.

9 To define the top and bottom of the log display view, do either of the following:
• Type values in the Top and Bottom boxes.

• Calculate the extents of the log data along the selected wells by clicking .

Notes
• These values are expressed in the unit of measure selected when you created the project.
• For information, GOCAD automatically calculates the vertical extension of the log display
view for you (see the Height box). This measurement is the difference between the top
and bottom. If you want to change the height, change the values in the Top and Bottom
boxes.

3-10 Visualizing Data in Log Displays GOCAD® 2009.1 User Guide

 Part
III

Visualization
10 If you want to control the size for displaying and printing the log display view, expand
the Log scale and paper size area, and then do any of the following:

To Do this
Change the scale In the Log scale box, enter the number of units that you want to
include per inch or centimeter of paper.
When you change the scale, the height value for Plot size (the size
of the paper that is needed to print the log display view data at the
current scale) adjusts automatically.

Otherwise, click .to have GOCAD determine the best scale to

use based on the log display view objects.

Important notes
• Specifying the log scale controls the size of the log data only. The
width and height values under Plot size do not account for the
tracks, track headers, or the legend that you might add to the
log display view. Before printing, you can view the total paper size
in the Dimension Settings dialog box and make adjustments if
needed. For more information, see "Editing Log Display View
Settings" on page 3-15.

Initially, when you create the view, the horizontal and vertical scales
are always set to 1:1. We recommend, if you want to change them,
that you do so before you start working in the view. To change the

scales, click View Settings (View toolbar), and then set

the top and bottom values (see"Editing Log Display View Settings"
on page 3-15).
Change the units for In the Paper unit box, select cm (centimeters) or in (inches).
display and printing

Note Accepted values for the scale are positive numbers with precision up to the thousandths
decimal place.

11 Click OK to carry out the command and close the dialog box, or click Apply to carry
out the command and leave the dialog box open.
When you carry out the command, the following occurs:
• The Log Display window opens, displaying the logs. If a template was selected in
step 7, the template track settings are automatically applied. For an overview of this
window, see "Quick Tour of the Log Display Window" on page 3-2.
• In the Object Tree, the name of the log display view appears in the Log Display list.
Tip You can create more • A new view is created in the project. For more information about views, see "Opening
than one view of the same
an Existing Log Display View" on page 3-14.
Log Display by opening a
new Log Display window. Note If you change the settings in the Create Log Display dialog box and then click Apply again,
For information, see the command creates another log display view and opens another Log Display window. If you do
"Opening a New 2D not change the name, the command adds _ n to the name, where n starts with zero.
Window" on page 1-11.

Rock & Fluid Canvas™ 2009 | Epos™ 4.0 3.3 Creating a Log Display 3-11
Paradigm™

To create a log display If you want to quickly create a log display view for a single well, do the following.
view from a well log
♦ Right-click a well log in the Object Tree, and then click Create Log Display.
– or –
Right-click a well log in a log track in an existing log display view or cross section
view, and then click Create Log Display.
When you create a log display view with this method, the following occurs:
• The log display view opens, and the well log appears in a log track. For an overview
of the window, see "Quick Tour of the Log Display Window" on page 3-2.
• In the Object Tree, the name of the log display view appears in the Log Display list.
The default name is LogDisplay_ WellName (if you create more than one log display
view from the same well, the command adds _ n to the name, where n starts with
zero).
Tip Opening a new window • A new view is created in the project. For more information about views, see "Opening
creates another view of the an Existing Log Display View" on page 3-14.
same log display view. For
information, see "Opening a
New 2D Window" on
page 1-11.

To create a log display 1 In the Object Tree, right-click Log Display, and then click New From Picked Wells.
view by picking wells
2 In the 3D Viewer, click the well path of each well that you want to include in the
in the 3D Viewer log display view except the last one.
3 Right-click the last well you want to include in the log display view.
When you create a log display view with this method, the following occurs:
• The Log Display window opens, and a pillar appears for each well you picked. On
the Objects tab, the wells corresponding to each pillar appear in the Pillars list. For an
overview of the window, see "Quick Tour of the Log Display Window" on page 3-2.
• In the Object Tree, the name of the log display view appears in the Log Display list.
The default name is DigitizedLogDisplay (if you create more than one log display view
by picking in the 3D Viewer or the Map window, the command adds _ n to the name,
where n starts with zero).
• A new view is created in the project. For more information about views, see "Opening
an Existing Log Display View" on page 3-14.
Tip You can create more than one view of the same log display view by opening a new
Log Display window. For information, see "Opening a New 2D Window" on page 1-11.

To create a log display 1 In the browser of the Map window, right-click Log Display, and then click New
view by picking wells From Picked Wells.
in the Map window 2 In the View, click each well you want to include in the log display except the last one.
3 Right-click the last well you want to include in the log display.
When you create a log display with this method, the following occurs:
• The Log Display window opens, and a pillar appears for each well you picked in the
order you picked them. On the Objects tab, the wells corresponding to each pillar
appear in the Pillars list. For an overview of the window, see "Quick Tour of the
Log Display Window" on page 3-2.

3-12 Visualizing Data in Log Displays GOCAD® 2009.1 User Guide

 Part
III

Visualization
• In the Object Tree, the name of the log display appears in the Log Display list. The
default name is DigitizedLogDisplay (if you create more than one log display by
picking in the 3D Viewer or the Map window, the command adds _n to the name,
where n starts with zero).
• A new view is created in the project. For more information about views, see "Opening
an Existing Log Display View" on page 3-14.
Tip You can create more than one view of the same log display by opening a new Log Display
window. For information, see "Opening a New 2D Window" on page 1-11.

To create a log display ♦ In the browser of the Cross Section window, right-click the property and click
view from a Log Display.
cross section view
A new view is created in the project under Log Display in the browser. For more
information about views, see "Opening an Existing Log Display View" on page 3-14.

To create a log display ♦ In the browser of the Log Display window, right-click the property and click
view from a Log Display.
log display view
A new view is created in the project under Log Display in the browser. For more
property information about views, see "Opening an Existing Log Display View" on page 3-14.

Rock & Fluid Canvas™ 2009 | Epos™ 4.0 3.3 Creating a Log Display 3-13
Paradigm™

3.4 Opening an Existing Log Display View

When you create a log display view, a window opens and a new view is created
automatically. If you want to create another view of the same log display view, you can
open a new Log Display window—for information, see "Opening a New 2D Window"
on page 1-11. When you create a view, it is saved in your project automatically, and you
can open it at any time.
Note The view and the work you do in it are stored in your computer's memory. You can close the
Log Display window without losing your work. However, if you want the view to be available the
next time you open the project, you must save the project.

To open a log display ♦ In the Object Tree, right-click the name of the log display view, point to Open View,
view and then click the view you want to open.

A log display view opens and displays the selected view.

Important Initially, when you create the view, the horizontal and vertical scales are set to
1:1. We recommend, if you want to change them, that you do so before you start
working in the view. To change the scales, click View Settings (View toolbar), and
then set the top and bottom values (see"Editing Log Display View Settings" on
page 3-15).

3-14 Visualizing Data in Log Displays GOCAD® 2009.1 User Guide

 Part
III

Visualization
3.5 Editing Log Display View Settings
You can access view settings for a log display view from the View toolbar by clicking
View Settings . In the View Settings dialog box, you can do any of the following:

• Change the dimensions of the view, the domain, and the scale
• Edit the order of the wells in the view
• Remove wells from the view
• Check the total size of the view before you print
• Scale the view to fit on a specific paper size when you print
The settings in the View Settings dialog box are the same as those that you can set
when you initially create a log display view (in the Create Log Display dialog box),
except you have additional options for fitting the view to a page and checking the total
size of the view before you print. This topic explains how to perform these additional
tasks. For information about the remaining settings, see "To create a log display view by
selecting wells and view settings" on page 3-8.
Note For information about how to add a legend, color bar, or scale bar, see "Displaying Legends,
Color Bars, and Scale Bars in a 2D View" on page 1-17.

Rock & Fluid Canvas™ 2009 | Epos™ 4.0 3.5 Editing Log Display View Settings 3-15
Paradigm™

To get the size of the 1 In a log display view, click View Settings on the View toolbar to open the
log display view or fit dialog box.
it to a page

2 To view the total size of the view, under Log scale and paper size, see the
information in the Total paper size area. Unlike the log paper size, the total paper
size accounts for not only the data but also for the other elements in the view such as
the tracks, headers, and the scale bar.
3 If you want to scale the log data so that the view will fit on a specific paper size when
printed, select the Fit to page check box, and then do one of the following:
• To specify a predefined paper size (A4, Letter, Legal, and so on), select it in the
box on the right.
• To define a custom page size, select Other in the box on the right, and then type
the width and height of the paper in the boxes below.
When you change this setting, the information in the Log scale box updates
automatically. The orientation of the printed page is assumed to be portrait.
Note For information about other view settings in this dialog box, see "To create a log display
view by selecting wells and view settings" on page 3-8.

3-16 Visualizing Data in Log Displays GOCAD® 2009.1 User Guide

 Part
III

Visualization
4 Click OK to carry out the command and close the dialog box, or click Apply to carry
out the command and leave the dialog box open.
Note If OK is not available (dimmed), you may need to specify the type of conversion curve or well
path units.

Rock & Fluid Canvas™ 2009 | Epos™ 4.0 3.5 Editing Log Display View Settings 3-17
Paradigm™

3.6 Working with Tracks

You can create and apply a template to standardize the look of tracks for all the pillars, or
you can adjust the tracks on pillars individually. You can work with tracks in a log display
view and cross section view the same way.
For information about how to create and apply a template, see "Creating and Working
with Pillar Templates" on page 3-61.
For information about how to work with tracks for an individual pillar, see:
• "Adding or Removing a Track from a Pillar or Pillar Template," page 3-18
• "Showing or Hiding Tracks," page 3-19
• "Changing Track Settings with the Track Editor," page 3-20
• "Accessing the Display Settings for a Track," page 3-21
• "Changing the Appearance of a Scale Track," page 3-21
• "Changing the Appearance of a Log Track," page 3-24
• "Changing the Appearance of an Interval Track," page 3-27
• "Changing the Appearance of a Stratigraphy or Chronostratigraphy Track,"
page 3-30
• "Changing the Appearance of a Seismic Track," page 3-31
• "Changing the Appearance of a Synthetic Track," page 3-34
• "Changing the Appearance of a Schematic Track," page 3-36

3.6.1 Adding or Removing a Track from a Pillar or

Pillar Template
You can add as many tracks as you want to a pillar or pillar template. For information
about the types of tracks, see "Components of a Log Display" on page 3-5. You can also
remove tracks. These procedures explain how to add and remove tracks individually. You
can also use the Track Editor to work with all the tracks on a pillar at the same time.
Using the Track Editor, you can add or remove tracks, change their order, and change a
scale track to display measured depth or true vertical depth subsea (two-way traveltime if
you are working in the time domain)—for information, see "Changing Track Settings with
the Track Editor" on page 3-20.
For information about how to work with tracks individually, see:
• "To add a track," page 3-18
• "To remove a track," page 3-19

To add a track ♦ On the Objects tab or in the view, right-click the pillar you want to add the track to,
and then do any of the following:
• To add a scale track, click Add Scale Track.
• To add a log track, click Add Log Track.
• To add an interval track, click Add Interval Track.
• To add a stratigraphy track, click Add Stratigraphy Track.
• To add a chronostratigraphy track, click Add Chronostratigraphy Track.

3-18 Visualizing Data in Log Displays GOCAD® 2009.1 User Guide

 Part
III

Visualization
To remove a track ♦ On the Objects tab, the Pillar Templates tab, or in the view, right-click the track
that you want to remove, and then click Remove Track.
Note If you want to remove multiple tracks, you can use the Track Editor. For information, see
"Changing Track Settings with the Track Editor" on page 3-20.

3.6.2 Showing or Hiding Tracks

You can show or hide tracks from the Objects tab or by using shortcuts in the view.
You can also show or hide tracks from the Track Editor—for information, see "Changing
Track Settings with the Track Editor" on page 3-20.

To show or hide ♦ Do any of the following:

tracks
• To show or hide all tracks for a pillar, right-click the pillar name on the Objects
tab or in the view, and then click Show All or Hide All.
• To show or hide all selected tracks, select or clear the check box next to the pillar
name in the Objects tab.
• To hide an individual track, right-click the track in the view, and then click Hide
Track.
• To show or hide an individual track, make sure the check box next to the pillar is
selected in the Objects tab, and then select or clear the check box next to the
track.

Rock & Fluid Canvas™ 2009 | Epos™ 4.0 3.6 Working with Tracks 3-19
Paradigm™

3.6.3 Changing Track Settings with the Track Editor

With the Track Editor (Figure 3–4), you can adjust the settings for all tracks on a pillar or
pillar template. You can do any of the following:
• Show or hide a track • Change a track type
• Add and remove tracks individually • Change the width of a track
• Remove multiple tracks at the same time • Show or hide the track header
• Change the order of tracks • Access track display attributes
• Change the vertical scale (domain).

Figure 3–4 Track Editor

1 On the Objects tab or in the view, right-click a pillar or track, click Track Editor, and
then do any of the following:
• To add a track, click Add. By default, the command adds a log track, but you can
change it to a scale track or interval track.
• To show or hide a track, select or clear the Visibility check box.

• To show or hide the track header (name of displayed logs) for a log track, select
or clear the Header check box.
• To change the track type, in the Track box, select the track you want—LogTrack,
ScaleTrack, or IntervalTrack. If you need more information about the tracks, see
"Components of a Log Display" on page 3-5.
• To change the domain for the track, in the Type box, select the domain type. For
example, for a ScaleTrack, select MD (measured depth), TVDSS (true vertical
depth subsea), or TWT (two-way traveltime), depending on whether you are
working in depth or time.
• To change the vertical scale (domain), in the Extra box select a curve to use to
convert between MD and the selected domain.
• To change the width of a track, in the Width box, type the width in inches.

Important Using Fit to View on the View toolbar zooms the tracks and
the data. The other zoom tools affect the data only. You can return the tracks to
their defined widths by clicking Reset Zoom .

3-20 Visualizing Data in Log Displays GOCAD® 2009.1 User Guide

 Part
III

Visualization
• To change other track display attributes, click Attributes, and then change the
settings in the Attributes dialog box. For more information depending on the
track type, see:
• "Changing the Appearance of a Scale Track" on page 3-21
• "Changing the Appearance of a Log Track" on page 3-24
• "Changing the Appearance of an Interval Track" on page 3-27
• "Changing the Appearance of a Stratigraphy or Chronostratigraphy Track"
on page 3-30
• "Changing the Appearance of a Seismic Track" on page 3-31
• "Changing the Appearance of a Synthetic Track" on page 3-34
• "Changing the Appearance of a Schematic Track" on page 3-36.

• To remove one or more tracks, select the tracks you want to remove, and then
click Remove.
• To change the order of the tracks, click the row you want to move, and then click
or .

2 When you finish, click OK to carry out the command and close the dialog box.
Note If OK is unavailable (dimmed), you may have selected a scale track (in time domain) in the
Track box, selected TWT in the Type box, and not specified a conversion curve. In this case, you
need to select a conversion curve in the Extra box.

3.6.4 Accessing the Display Settings for a Track

You can use settings available in the Attribute toolbar and the Attributes dialog box to
change the appearance of tracks.
For information about how to open the Attribute toolbar and the Attributes dialog box
for a track, see:
• "To open the Attribute toolbar for a track," page 3-21
• "To open the Attributes dialog box for a track," page 3-21

To open the Attribute ♦ In the Objects tab, select the name of the track.
toolbar for a track
The Attribute toolbar for the track appears at the bottom of the window.

To open the ♦ Right-click on the track in the log display view or in the Objects tab, right-click the
Attributes dialog box name of the track and then click Track Attributes to open the dialog box.
for a track

3.6.5 Changing the Appearance of a Scale Track

You can set the width of a scale track and control the appearance of the major and minor
ticks by using the Attribute toolbar.
You can also use settings in the Attributes dialog box to control the track width, show or
hide ticks, and show or hide the measurement labels next to major ticks.
Figure 3–5 illustrates attributes you can set for a scale track.

Rock & Fluid Canvas™ 2009 | Epos™ 4.0 3.6 Working with Tracks 3-21
Paradigm™

Figure 3–5 Scale track Scale track width

attributes

Major tick
Minor tick

Label

For more information, see:

• "Attribute toolbar for a scale track," page 3-22
• "Attributes for a scale track," page 3-23
Note By using the Track Editor, you can change the scale between MD or TVDSS (two-way
traveltime if you are working in the time domain). For information, see "Changing Track Settings
with the Track Editor" on page 3-20.

Attribute toolbar for In a log display view or cross section view, when you select the name of a scale track in
a scale track the Objects tab, the Attribute toolbar for that scale track is displayed at the bottom of
the window. The same settings are available for major ticks and minor ticks. For an
illustration of major and minor ticks, see Figure 3–5 on page 3-22.
Major ticks settings
Minor ticks settings
Track width

Major Tick Label

Color
Length
Color Major Tick Label Size
Show or hide Major Tick Label Font

Width. Specifies the scale track width in inches.

Important Clicking Fit to View on the View toolbar zooms the

tracks and the data. The other zoom tools affect the data only. You can
return the tracks to their defined widths by clicking Reset Zoom .

Major Ticks. Displays major ticks on the scale. To specify the color of the

ticks, click Major Ticks Color , and then click the color.

Major Ticks Length. Specifies the length of major ticks.

3-22 Visualizing Data in Log Displays GOCAD® 2009.1 User Guide

 Part
III

Visualization
Minor Ticks. Displays minor ticks on the scale. To specify the color of the

ticks, click Minor Ticks Color next to the button, and then click the
color.

Minor Ticks Length. Specifies the length of minor ticks.

Major Tick Label Font. Specifies the font family to display text labels at
major ticks.

Major Tick Label Size. Specifies the font size to display text labels at
major ticks.

Major Tick Label Color. Specifies the font color to display text labels at
major ticks.

Attributes for a scale You can specify scale track settings, such as the track width and whether to show or hide
track ticks, in the Attributes dialog box for a scale track. For information about how to open
the dialog box, see "Accessing the Display Settings for a Track" on page 3-21.

Visible. Displays the scale track.

Header visible. Displays the header above the track.
Track width. Move the slider to change the width of the scale track in inches.

Important Using Fit to View on the View toolbar zooms the tracks and the
data. The other zoom tools affect the data only. You can return the tracks to their
defined widths by clicking Reset Zoom .

Major ticks

Rock & Fluid Canvas™ 2009 | Epos™ 4.0 3.6 Working with Tracks 3-23
Paradigm™

Visible. Displays major ticks on the scale. For an illustration, see Figure 3–5 on
page 3-22.
Label visible. Displays the measurement label on the scale. For an illustration, see
Figure 3–5 on page 3-22.
Minor ticks
Visible. Displays minor ticks on the scale. For an illustration, see Figure 3–5 on
page 3-22.

3.6.6 Changing the Appearance of a Log Track

You can specify the width of a log track, control the appearance of the primary and
secondary grid, and select the vertical scale type (either linear or logarithmic) by using the
Attribute toolbar.
For the vertical grid, you can use additional settings in the Attributes dialog box to
control the number of primary and secondary divisions for a linear scale or the number of
cycles for a logarithmic scale.
Figure 3–6 illustrates attributes you can set for a log track. In this illustration, the lines in
the primary grid are black, and the lines in the secondary grid are grey; the scale type is
linear.

Figure 3–6 Log track Log track width

attributes

Vertical primary
grid line
Vertical secondary
grid line

Horizontal primary
grid line
Horizontal
secondary grid line

For more information, see:

• "Attribute toolbar for a scale track," page 3-22
• "Attributes for a scale track," page 3-23

3-24 Visualizing Data in Log Displays GOCAD® 2009.1 User Guide

 Part
III

Visualization
Attribute toolbar for In a Log Display window or Cross Section window, when you select the name of a log
a log track track in the Objects tab, the Attribute toolbar for that log track is displayed at the
bottom of the window. For an illustration of the primary and secondary grid, see
Figure 3–6 on page 3-24.

Secondary Horizontal Grid

Primary Horizontal Grid

Vertical Scale Type

Secondary Vertical Grid
Primary Vertical Grid
Track Width

Width. Specifies the log track width in inches.

Important Using Fit to View on the View toolbar zooms the tracks
and the data. The other zoom tools affect the data only. You can return the
tracks to their defined widths by clicking Reset Zoom .

Primary Vertical Grid. Displays the primary vertical grid. To specify the

color of the grid, click next to the button, and then click the color.

Secondary Vertical Grid. Displays the secondary vertical grid. To specify

the color of the grid, click next to the button, and then click the color.

Vertical Scale Type. Sets the type of scale for plotting values in the track
to either linear or logarithmic.
Note By using settings in the Attributes dialog box, you can change the number of
primary and secondary divisions for a linear scale or the number of cycles for a
logarithmic scale.

Primary Horizontal Grid. Displays the primary horizontal grid. To specify

the color of the grid, click next to the button, and then click the color.

Secondary Horizontal Grid. Displays the secondary horizontal grid. To

specify the color of the grid, click next to the button, and then click the
color.

Rock & Fluid Canvas™ 2009 | Epos™ 4.0 3.6 Working with Tracks 3-25
Paradigm™

Attributes dialog box You can specify log track settings, such as the track width, appearance of grid lines, and
for a log track the vertical scale type. For information about how to open the Attributes dialog box, see
"Accessing the Display Settings for a Track" on page 3-21.

Visible. Displays the log track.

Header visible. Displays the header above the track.
Track width. Move the slider to change the width of the log track in inches.

Important Using Fit to View on the View toolbar zooms the tracks and the
data. The other zoom tools affect the data only. You can return the tracks to their
defined widths by clicking Reset Zoom .

Vertical grid, Primary

Visible. Displays primary vertical grid lines. Click the color button to change the
color. For an illustration of primary vertical grid lines, see Figure 3–6 on page 3-24.
Vertical grid, Secondary
Visible. Displays secondary vertical grid lines. Click the color button to change the
color. For an illustration of secondary vertical grid lines, see Figure 3–6 on page 3-24.
Scale type. Specifies the type of scale for plotting values in the track to either linear
or logarithmic.
Major ticks. Move the slider to specify the number of primary divisions you want in
the vertical grid. This setting is available only if the scale type is linear.
Minor ticks. Move the slider to specify the number of secondary divisions you want
in the vertical grid. This setting is available only if the scale type is linear.
Cycle. Move the slider to specify the number of logarithmic cycles. This setting is
available only if the scale type is logarithmic.

3-26 Visualizing Data in Log Displays GOCAD® 2009.1 User Guide

 Part
III

Visualization
Horizontal grid, Primary
Visible. Displays primary horizontal grid lines. Click the color button to change the
color. For an illustration of primary vertical grid lines, see Figure 3–6 on page 3-24.
Horizontal grid, Secondary
Visible. Displays secondary horizontal grid lines. Click the color button to change the
color. For an illustration of secondary vertical grid lines, see Figure 3–6 on page 3-24.

3.6.7 Changing the Appearance of an Interval Track

You can specify the width of an interval track by using the Attribute toolbar. You can also
use additional settings in the Attributes dialog box to apply curve boundaries to the
lithology displayed in the track.
Figure 3–7 illustrates attributes you can specify for an interval track. The track on the left
is an example of an interval track in which a simulated facies property is displayed. On the
right, the track is widened and a sonic curve bounds the facies on the left and a density
curve bounds the facies on the right.

Figure 3–7 Interval track Interval track width

attributes

Left boundary
curve
Right boundary
curve

For more information, see:

• "Attribute toolbar for an interval track," page 3-27
• "Attributes for an interval track," page 3-28
• "To use curve boundaries in an interval track," page 3-29
For information about working with data in an interval track, see

Attribute toolbar for In a Log Display window or Cross Section window, when you select the name of an
an interval track interval track in the Objects tab, the Attribute toolbar for that interval track is displayed
at the bottom of the window. This toolbar has only one setting.

Lithology Labels

Track width

Rock & Fluid Canvas™ 2009 | Epos™ 4.0 3.6 Working with Tracks 3-27
Paradigm™

Width. Specifies the interval track width in inches.

Important Using Fit to View on the View toolbar zooms the tracks and
the data. The other zoom tools affect the data only. You can return the tracks to
their defined widths by clicking Reset Zoom .

Lithology Labels. Shows or hides labels for intervals displayed in the interval
track.

Attributes for an You can specify interval track settings, such as the track width and whether to use log
interval track curves as boundaries, in the Attributes dialog box for a log track. For information about
how to open the dialog box, see "Accessing the Display Settings for a Track" on
page 3-21.

Visible. Displays the interval track.

Header visible. Displays the header above the track.
Track width. Move the slider to change the width of the interval track in inches.

Important Using Fit to View on the View toolbar zooms the tracks and the
data. The other zoom tools affect the data only. You can return the tracks to their
defined widths by clicking Reset Zoom .

Lithology labels. Displays the name for each discrete property in the track.
Boundaries
Use curve boundaries. Select this check box if you want to specify log curves to use
as boundaries for the lithology. When you use this setting, the area of the track from
the left boundary curve to the left track edge is blank, the area between the curves
contains the lithology or other discrete property, and the area of the track from the
right boundary curve to the right track edge is also blank. The names of the bounding
curves appear as log headers above the interval track.

3-28 Visualizing Data in Log Displays GOCAD® 2009.1 User Guide

 Part
III

Visualization
For more information and an example, see "To use curve boundaries in an interval
track" on page 3-29.
Left curve. Select the curve to use as the boundary on the left. Click the color button
to change the curve color. This setting applies only if the Use curve boundaries
check box is selected.
Right curve. Select the curve to use as the boundary on the right. Click the color
button to change the curve color. This setting applies only if the Use curve
boundaries check box is selected.

To use curve In the Attributes dialog box for an interval track, you can select log curves to use as
boundaries in an boundaries for the lithology. For example, in Figure 3–8, the left boundary is a sonic curve
interval track and the right boundary is a density curve.

Figure 3–8 Boundary

curves in an interval track

For information about how to open the Attributes dialog box, see "Accessing the Display
Settings for a Track" on page 3-21.
Tip For best results, use The selected curves appear in the interval track and bound the displayed lithology. The
Strip Zoom to zoom
names of the curves appear above the interval track.
in on the area of interest. 1 In the Attributes dialog box for the interval track, under Boundaries, select the Use
For information, see curve boundaries check box.
"Zooming a 2D View" on
page 1-8. 2 In the Left curve box, select the log curve to use as the boundary for the lithology on
the left side, and then click the color button to change the curve color. The following
figure shows the settings for the log display view shown in Figure 3–8.

3 In the Right curve box, select the log curve to use as the boundary for the lithology
on the right side, and then click the color button to change the curve color.
4 Click OK to carry out the command and close the dialog box, or click Apply to carry
out the command and leave the dialog box open.
The selected curves appear in the interval track and bound the displayed lithology. The
names of the curves appear above the interval track.

Rock & Fluid Canvas™ 2009 | Epos™ 4.0 3.6 Working with Tracks 3-29
Paradigm™

3.6.8 Changing the Appearance of a Stratigraphy or

Chronostratigraphy Track
You can specify the width of a stratigraphy and chronostratigraphy track, show or hide
the header, and specify the stratigraphic rank and stratigraphic column by using the
Attributes dialog box. Figure 3–9 illustrates attributes you can specify for a stratigraphic
track.

Figure 3–9 Stratigraphic Stratigraphic track width

track attributes

Header

Attribute dialog box You can specify stratigraphic and chronostratigraphy track settings, such as the track
for a stratigraphic width in the Attributes dialog box for a log track. For information about how to open
track the dialog box, see "Accessing the Display Settings for a Track" on page 3-21.

Visible. Displays the stratigraphic track.

Header visible. Displays the header above the track.
Track width. Move the slider to change the width of the stratigraphic track in inches.

3-30 Visualizing Data in Log Displays GOCAD® 2009.1 User Guide

 Part
III

Visualization
Important Using Fit to View on the View toolbar zooms the tracks and the
data. The other zoom tools affect the data only. You can return the tracks to their
defined widths by clicking Reset Zoom .

Stratigraphy rank. Select the time or relative age in which to order the features in the
track.
Stratigraphy column. Select the stratigraphic column to use for the track.

3.6.9 Changing the Appearance of a Seismic Track

You can specify the width of seismic track, control the appearance of the primary and
secondary horizontal grid, and specify how to display the trace by using the Attribute
toolbar. You can also use additional settings in the Attributes dialog box to apply specify
how the data is shown in the track.
Figure 3–10 illustrates attributes that you can specify for a seismic track.

Figure 3–10 Seismic track Seismic track width

attributes

Seismic trace:
Wiggle

For more information, see:

• "To add seismic data to a seismic track," page 3-32
• "Attribute toolbar for a seismic track," page 3-32
• "Attributes for a seismic track," page 3-33

Rock & Fluid Canvas™ 2009 | Epos™ 4.0 3.6 Working with Tracks 3-31
Paradigm™

To add seismic data to 1 Right-click the seismic track, and then click Add Seismic to open the dialog box.
a seismic track

2 In the Voxet name box, select the voxet that contains the seismic data.
3 In the Voxet property box, select the seismic property that you want to show in the
track.
4 In the Window box, specify window size by typing a value.
GOCAD uses this value to calculate the total number of traces to display in the track,
where the number of traces = 2 × window size +1. For example, if you specify a
window size of four, GOCAD displays nine traces.
5 If you want to specify the pillar or track to which to apply the data; expand
Advanced and do any of the following as necessary:

• To specify the pillar, in the Pillar name box, select the pillar to which you want to
add the seismic data.
• In the Track name box, select the seismic track that you want to apply the
seismic data.
6 Click OK to carry out the command and close the dialog box, or click Apply to carry
out the command and leave the dialog box open.

Attribute toolbar for In a log display view or cross section view, when you select the name of an seismic track
a seismic track on the Objects tab, the Attribute toolbar for that seismic track is displayed at the
bottom of the window.

Width. Specifies the seismic track width in inches.

Important Using Fit to View on the View toolbar zooms the
tracks and the data. The other zoom tools affect the data only. You
can return the tracks to their defined widths by clicking Reset
Zoom .

3-32 Visualizing Data in Log Displays GOCAD® 2009.1 User Guide

 Part
III

Visualization
Trace type. Specifies how to show the data traces in the track. Your
choices are: Density, Density and Wiggles, Monochrome
Wiggles, Color Wiggles, and Lobe Wiggles.

Primary Horizontal Grid. Displays the primary horizontal grid. To

specify the color of the grid, click next to the button, and then
click the color.

Secondary Horizontal Grid. Displays the secondary horizontal grid.

To specify the color of the grid, click next to the button, and then
click the color.

Attributes for a You can specify seismic track settings, such as the track width and how to display traces,
seismic track in the Attributes dialog box for a seismic track. For information about how to open the
dialog box, see "Accessing the Display Settings for a Track" on page 3-21.

Visible. Displays the seismic track.

Header visible. Displays the header above the track.
Track width. Move the slider to change the width of the seismic track in inches.

Important Using Fit to View on the View toolbar zooms the tracks and the
data. The other zoom tools affect the data only. You can return the tracks to their
defined widths by clicking Reset Zoom .

Display. Specifies how to show the data traces in the track. Your choices are: Density,
Density and Wiggles, Monochrome Wiggles, Color Wiggles, and Lobe Wiggles.
Horizontal grid, Primary
Visible. Displays primary horizontal grid lines. Click the color button to change the
color. For an illustration of primary vertical grid lines, see Figure 3–6 on page 3-24.
Horizontal grid, Secondary
Visible. Displays secondary horizontal grid lines. Click the color button to change the
color. For an illustration of secondary vertical grid lines, see Figure 3–6 on page 3-24.

Rock & Fluid Canvas™ 2009 | Epos™ 4.0 3.6 Working with Tracks 3-33
Paradigm™

3.6.10 Changing the Appearance of a Synthetic Track

You can specify the width of a synthetic track, how to display the synthetic traces, and
add time depth points by using the Attribute toolbar and Attributes dialog box.
Figure 3–11 illustrates attributes you can set for a log track.

Figure 3–11 Synthetic

track attributes Synthetic track width

Synthetic trace:
Color wiggle

Time-Depth point

For more information, see:

• "Attribute toolbar for a scale track," page 3-22
• "Attributes for a scale track," page 3-23

Attribute toolbar for In a Log Display window or Cross Section window, when you select the name of a
a synthetic track synthetic track in the Objects tab, the Attribute toolbar for that seismic track is
displayed at the bottom of the window.

Width. Specifies the seismic track width in inches.

Important Using Fit to View on the View toolbar zooms
the tracks and the data. The other zoom tools affect the data
only. You can return the tracks to their defined widths by
clicking Reset Zoom .

Trace type. Specifies how to show the data traces in the track.
Your choices are: Density, Density and Wiggles,
Monochrome Wiggles, Color Wiggles, and Lobe Wiggles.

Primary Horizontal Grid. Displays the primary horizontal grid.

To specify the color of the grid, click next to the button, and
then click the color.

3-34 Visualizing Data in Log Displays GOCAD® 2009.1 User Guide

 Part
III

Visualization
Secondary Horizontal Grid. Displays the secondary horizontal

grid. To specify the color of the grid, click next to the button,
and then click the color.

Time-Depth Curve. Displays the time-depth curve. To specify

the color of the curve, click next to the button, and then click
the color.

Attributes for a You can specify synthetic track settings, such as the track width, appearance of grid lines,
synthetic track and how to show the synthetic trace. For information about how to open the Attributes
dialog box, see "Accessing the Display Settings for a Track" on page 3-21.

Visible. Displays the synthetic track.

Header visible. Displays the header above the track.
Track width. Move the slider to change the width of the synthetic track in inches.

Important Using Fit to View on the View toolbar zooms the tracks and the
data. The other zoom tools affect the data only. You can return the tracks to their
defined widths by clicking Reset Zoom .

Display. Specifies how to show the data traces in the track. Your choices are: Density,
Density and Wiggles, Monochrome Wiggles, Color Wiggles, and Lobe Wiggles.
Horizontal grid, Primary
Visible. Displays primary horizontal grid lines. Click the color button to change the
color. For an illustration of primary vertical grid lines, see Figure 3–6 on page 3-24.
Horizontal grid, Secondary
Visible. Displays secondary horizontal grid lines. Click the color button to change the
color. For an illustration of secondary vertical grid lines, see Figure 3–6 on page 3-24.

Rock & Fluid Canvas™ 2009 | Epos™ 4.0 3.6 Working with Tracks 3-35
Paradigm™

3.6.11 Changing the Appearance of a Schematic

Track
You can specify the width of a schematic track, specify the appearance of grid lines, and
display cement indicators and casing types by using the Attribute toolbar.
In a log display view, you can display casings, tubing, and perforations for a well in a
schematic track by selecting the casing, tubing, and perforation type from the Objects
tab.
Note You can also add casings, tubing, and perforations to a well from the Object Tree. For
information, see Part IV: Foundation Modeling , "Working with Casings, Perforations, and Tubings,"
page 7-27.

Figure 3–12 illustrates attributes you can set for a schematic track. In this figure, the
primary grid lines are black, and the secondary grid lines are gray; the scale type is linear.

Figure 3–12 Schematic Log track width

track attributes

Cement
indicator

Perforation
ticks

Casing type

For more information, see:

• "To show or hide casing, perforation, or tubing in a schematic track," page 3-36
• "Attribute toolbar for a schematic track," page 3-37
• "Attributes for a schematic track," page 3-37

To show or hide 1 In a log display view, on the Objects tab, expand the SchematicTrack category,
casing, perforation, select or clear the Casing, Tubing, or Perforation check box.
or tubing in a 2 To see individual types, expand the Casing, Tubing, or Perforation category, and
schematic track then select the check box for the type. For example, under Casing, select the Liner
check box.

3-36 Visualizing Data in Log Displays GOCAD® 2009.1 User Guide

 Part
III

Visualization
Attribute toolbar for In a log display view or cross section view, when you select the name of a schematic track
a schematic track on the Objects tab, the Attribute toolbar for that schematic track is displayed at the
bottom of the window.

Width. Specifies the seismic track width in inches. Important Using Fit to
View on the View toolbar zooms the tracks and the data. The other zoom
tools affect the data only. You can return the tracks to their defined widths by
clicking Reset Zoom .

Decorator. Displays the casing type name in the schematic track. For example,
Liner.

Tubular Width. Valid values are from 0 to 10.

Cement. Displays an indicator where cement is applied in the schematic.

Primary Horizontal Grid. Displays the primary horizontal grid. To specify the

color of the grid, click next to the button, and then click the color.

Secondary Horizontal Grid. Displays the secondary horizontal grid. To specify

the color of the grid, click next to the button, and then click the color.

Attributes for a You can specify schematic track settings, such as the track width, appearance of grid
schematic track lines, and display cement indicators and casing type names. For information about how to
open the Attributes dialog box, see "Accessing the Display Settings for a Track" on
page 3-21.

Visible. Displays the log track.

Header visible. Displays the header above the track.
Track width. Move the slider to change the width of the track in inches.

Rock & Fluid Canvas™ 2009 | Epos™ 4.0 3.6 Working with Tracks 3-37
Paradigm™

Important Using Fit to View on the View toolbar zooms the tracks and the
data. The other zoom tools affect the data only. You can return the tracks to their
defined widths by clicking Reset Zoom .

Decorator. Displays the type of casing.

Cement. Displays an indicator to show where cement is applied.
Horizontal grid, Primary
Visible. Displays primary horizontal grid lines. Click the color button to change the
color. For an illustration of primary vertical grid lines, see Figure 3–6 on page 3-24.
Horizontal grid, Secondary
Visible. Displays secondary horizontal grid lines. Click the color button to change the
color. For an illustration of secondary vertical grid lines, see Figure 3–6 on page 3-24.

3-38 Visualizing Data in Log Displays GOCAD® 2009.1 User Guide

 Part
III

Visualization
3.7 Working with Logs in Tracks
When you create a log display view or a cross section view with wells, any existing well
logs automatically appear on the Objects tab under log tracks and interval tracks. You
can create and apply a template to standardize the logs for all of the wells, or you can
adjust the logs for individual wells.
In both log display views and cross section views, you can extract a log curve from a
stratigraphic grid property or a voxet property along the well path and add it to a track. In
log display views, you can additionally extract a log from another well and show the log
curve in the same track for comparison.
You can show as many logs as you want and adjust their appearance. In addition to
changing the color, line width, and pattern of a log curve, you can fill the log curves using
various methods and show or hide the log header above the track.
Note To adjust the appearance of a log in an interval track, you need to edit the classification. For
information, see Part IV: Foundation Modeling , "Defining Classifications" on page 10-2. You can
also use log curves as boundaries for a log in an interval track. For more information, see "To use
curve boundaries in an interval track" on page 3-29.

For information about how to work with logs for an individual well, see the following
topics. For information about how to create and apply a template, see "Creating and
Working with Pillar Templates" on page 3-61.
• "What Can I Do with Log Data in a 2D View?," page 3-39
• "Showing or Hiding Logs or Lithology in Tracks," page 3-40
• "Adding or Removing an External Log in a Log Display," page 3-41
• "Adding an Image Log to a Log Track," page 3-45
• "Changing Graphic Attributes of Log Curves in Tracks," page 3-46

3.7.1 What Can I Do with Log Data in a 2D View?

In a 2D view, you can quickly access commands for creating and manipulating logs from
the Objects tab by right-clicking the Logs category (for a specific pillar) or the name of a
log in the list, or by right-clicking a log curve in the active view. For example, you can do
any of the following.

To Right-click For information, see

Copy, delete, or rename a log Log name Part IV: Foundation Modeling, "Copying, Deleting, and
Log curve in the view Renaming an Object Property," page 11-5
Change the graphic attributes of a log Log curve in the view "Changing Graphic Attributes of Log Curves in Tracks,"
page 3-46
Apply a script to a log Logs category Part IV: Foundation Modeling , "Applying a Property Script on an
Log name Object," page 11-27
Log curve in the view
Create a log by defining a property type Logs category Part IV: Foundation Modeling, "Creating an Object Property,"
page 11-3
Edit property settings for a log Log name Part IV: Foundation Modeling, "Editing Property Settings,"
Log curve in the view page 11-7
Create a log by transferring a property from a Logs category Part IV: Foundation Modeling, "Transferring Properties from
nearby grid cell or by using vertical projection Another Object," page 11-14
Create a histogram or 2D cross plot of a log Log name Part IV: Foundation Modeling, "Analyzing Data," page 11-37
Log curve in the view
(Continued 1 of 2)

Rock & Fluid Canvas™ 2009 | Epos™ 4.0 3.7 Working with Logs in Tracks 3-39
Paradigm™

To Right-click For information, see

View a spreadsheet of the log values and edit Logs category "Exporting Logs to a CSV File," page 3-60
or export the values to a CSV (comma Log name
separated value) file Log curve in the view
Initialize the values of a log to a constant Log name
Log curve in the view
Import a log from a column-based file, an LAS Logs category Part II: Data Import and Export, "Importing Well Data,"
file, or an ASCII file page 1-71
Export a log to an LAS, ASCII, or Excel file Log name Part II: Data Import and Export:
Log curve in the view "Exporting a Well to an LAS File," page 2-61
"Exporting Well Logs to an ASCII File," page 2-63
"Exporting Object Properties to Excel," page 2-7
Create a new log display view from a log Log name "To create a log display view from a well log," page 3-12
Log curve in the view
(Continued 2 of 2)

You can also edit data points on a log curve by using the Well Curves toolbar. For more
information, see "Editing a Well Log in a Cross Section or Log Display" on page 7-10.

3.7.2 Showing or Hiding Logs or Lithology in Tracks

For information about how to show or hide log curves in a log track or lithology in an
interval track, see:
• "To show logs in a track," page 3-40
• "To hide logs in a track," page 3-40

To show logs in a ♦ Do any of the following:

track
• To show all logs in a log track or lithology in an interval track, right-click the track
in the Objects tab or in the view, and then click Show All.
• To show an individual log or lithology, in the Objects tab, select the check box
next to its name.
Note By default, the log header, which includes the name of the log and minimum and maximum
values, appears above the track You can hide the header for an individual log by using the
Attributes dialog box for the log. For information, see "To show or hide the log header" on
page 3-54.

To hide logs in a track ♦ Do any of the following:

• To hide all logs in a log track or lithology in an interval track, right-click the track
in the Objects tab or in the view, and then click Hide All.
• To hide an individual log or lithology, clear the check box next to its name in the
Objects tab.

3-40 Visualizing Data in Log Displays GOCAD® 2009.1 User Guide

 Part
III

Visualization
3.7.3 Adding or Removing an External Log in a
Log Display
In a log display view, you can add an external log to a log track from these sources:
• Stratigraphic grid (SGrid) property. An SGrid property can be extracted from cells
along the well path by using one of the methods described in "Methods for
extracting a curve from a stratigraphic grid" on page 3-44.
You might want to extract a curve from an SGrid as a quality control step. For
example, you can compare upscaled values stored on an SGrid with the fine-scaled
well log representing the same property, such as porosity. Figure 3–13 illustrates this
example. The solid curve represents the upscaled porosity values in cells intersected
by the C6 well in an SGrid named Reservoir. Because wells are usually used as hard
data during petrophysical property simulation, you can check the upscaling by
comparing the well log and the SGrid property extracted at the well location.

Figure 3–13 Porosity Well name

curve extracted from an
SGrid and displayed with
a porosity well log

Well C6 porosity log

Porosity property (poro)

extracted from an SGrid
(Reservoir) along the path
of C6

• Voxet property. A voxet property can be extracted from cells intersected by the well
path. You might want to do this to check data from different sources—for example,
checkshot data on the well and a seismic amplitude property extracted at the location
of the well.
Note Because all grid cells in a voxet are the same size, you do not need to specify a method
for extracting the curve from a voxet. (All the extraction methods would give the same result.)

• Well log. A log can be extracted from another well. In this case, values are extracted
from the external well at each measured depth. For an illustration, see Figure 3–14.
The solid curve represents the porosity log on an external well named C11. Extracting
a log from a different well is a convenient way to compare logs on the same track
with the same scale—for example, during well correlation.
Note When you extract a log curve from another well, you do not need to specify an extraction
method because the method is always to extract the value at each measured depth.

Rock & Fluid Canvas™ 2009 | Epos™ 4.0 3.7 Working with Logs in Tracks 3-41
Paradigm™

Figure 3–14 Porosity log Well name

extracted from another
well and displayed with
porosity log on the well

Well C6 porosity log

Well C11 porosity log

When you add an external log, the command gives the curve a new name specifying the
curve source. This convention ensures that any existing logs on the well with the same
name are not overwritten.
For more information, see:
• "To add an external log to a log track in a log display view," page 3-42
• "To add an external log to an interval track in a log display view," page 3-44
• "Methods for extracting a curve from a stratigraphic grid," page 3-44
• "To remove an external log from a track," page 3-45

To add an external 1 Right-click the log track in the viewer or the name of the track in the Objects tab,
log to a log track in a and then click Add External Log to open the dialog box.
log display view

2 In the Log Display box, enter the log display view object to which you want to add
an external log.

3-42 Visualizing Data in Log Displays GOCAD® 2009.1 User Guide

 Part
III

Visualization
3 Do one of the following:
• If you want to add one or more curves from an SGrid, click from SGrid, enter the
SGrid in the Stratigraphic grid name box, enter the property you want to add
to the track in the SGrid property box, and then, in the Method box, select the
method that you want to use for extracting properties from the grid cells along
the well path. For information about the available methods, see "Methods for
extracting a curve from a stratigraphic grid" on page 3-44.
The following example shows the settings for the extracted curve shown in
Figure 3–13 on page 3-41.

• If you want to add one or more curves from a voxet, click from Voxet, enter the
voxet in the Voxet name box, and then enter the properties you want to add to
the track in the Voxet property box.

• If you want to add one or more curves from a well, click from Well, enter the
well in the Well name box, and then enter the properties you want to add to the
track in the Well property box.
The following example shows the settings for the extracted curve shown in
Figure 3–14 on page 3-42.

4 Do one of the following:

• If you want to create the curve on the well and not just display it in the track,
select the Export log check box. If you use this option, the extracted curve will
not be linked to the source data. (The extracted curve will not update if the
source data is modified, and the source data will not update if the extracted
curve is modified.)
• If you want to add the curve for display only and not create it on the well, clear
the Export log check box. In this case, the extracted curve will be linked to the
source data. (The extracted curve will update if the source data is modified, and
the source data will update if the extracted curve is modified.) However, the
extracted curve will not be available outside the Log Display window.
5 Click OK to carry out the command and close the dialog box, or click Apply to carry
out the command and leave the dialog box open.
Note The information in the Advanced area of the dialog box is used internally to carry contextual
information. We recommend that you do not change it.

The external log appears on the Objects tab, listed under the log track. If you exported
the curve to the well (by leaving the Export log check box selected), the curve also
appears in the Object Tree in the list of logs for the well. The naming convention for an
exported curve is PropertyName_of_ SourceObjectName. Or, if you did not export the
curve, the naming convention is PropertyName(SourceObjectName ).

Rock & Fluid Canvas™ 2009 | Epos™ 4.0 3.7 Working with Logs in Tracks 3-43
Paradigm™

To add an external Adding an external log to an interval track is similar to adding one to a log track.
log to an interval However, the list of properties from which you can extract the curve is narrowed to only
track in a log display discrete properties—for example, facies interpretations and simulated facies properties—
view that are appropriate for display in an interval track.
1 Right-click the interval track in the viewer or the name of the track in the Objects
tab, and then click Add External Log to open the Add External Interval Curve in
Log Display Track dialog box.
2 Complete step 2 through step 5 in "To add an external log to a log track in a
log display view" on page 3-42.
The external log appears in the Objects tab, listed under the interval track. If you
exported the curve to the well (by leaving the Export log check box selected), the curve
also appears in the GOCAD window Object Tree in the list of logs for the well. The
naming convention for an exported curve is PropertyName_of_ SourceObjectName. If you
did not export the curve, the naming convention is PropertyName (SourceObjectName).

Methods for When you add an external log from a stratigraphic grid, you can select the method to
extracting a curve extract the log curve from a stratigraphic grid property along the well path. Figure 3–15
from a stratigraphic illustrates the results of using the Intersected Cell option and the Closest Cell Center
grid (W) option (the same principle illustrated for closest cell center along w applies to the
closest cell center along u or v).
• Intersected Cell. Extracts the property values from each stratigraphic grid cell that
the well path intersects.
• Closest Cell Center (U). Extracts property values from each stratigraphic grid cell
whose center along the u-axis is closest to the well path.
• Closest Cell Center (V). Extracts property values from each stratigraphic grid cell
whose center along the v-axis is closest to the well path.
• Closest Cell Center (W). Extracts property values from each stratigraphic grid cell
whose center along the w-axis is closest to the well path.

Figure 3–15 Intersected

Cell and Closest Cell Well path
Center (W) extraction
method Stratigraphic grid
C3
I1
I2 C4
C1
C2

In the figure, the intersected cell method extracts the values from C1 and C2 (because I1
is in C1 and I2 is in C2), and the closest cell center (W) method extracts the values from
C3 and C4 (because I1 is closer to C3 and I2 is closer to C4 along the w-axis).
Note Because all grid cells in a voxet are the same size, you do not need to specify a method for
extracting the curve from a voxet. (All the extraction methods would give the same result.) Likewise,
if you are extracting a curve from another well in a log display view , you do not need to specify an
extraction method because the method is always to extract the value at each measured depth.

3-44 Visualizing Data in Log Displays GOCAD® 2009.1 User Guide

 Part
III

Visualization
To remove an You can remove an external log from a log track or an interval track if the curve was not
external log from a exported. For details about exporting an external log, see step 4 in "To add an external
track log to a log track in a log display view" on page 3-42.
♦ In the Objects tab, expand the log track or the interval track, right-click the external
log, and then click Remove Log from Track.

3.7.4 Adding an Image Log to a Log Track

Tip To access the command If you import a well image as an image log, you can display it in a log track. An image log
to import an image log, click is a picture of the core that you can display flattened or as a cylinder. Image logs are often
the File menu in the
used to analyze facies and fractures. They can show you that formations are dipping, for
GOCAD window, point to
Import Objects, point to
example. The image log in Figure 3–16 shows resistivity at the drill bit.
Images, and then click As
Image Log.

Figure 3–16 Image log

Image log

To show an image log 1 In the Objects tab, select the check box next to the image log to show it in a log
track.
2 Use the Attributes toolbar for the log track to hide the grid lines. For more
information, see "Changing the Appearance of a Log Track" on page 3-24.

Rock & Fluid Canvas™ 2009 | Epos™ 4.0 3.7 Working with Logs in Tracks 3-45
Paradigm™

3.7.5 Changing Graphic Attributes of Log Curves in

Tracks
On the Attribute toolbar for a log, you can find the most common settings to control the
appearance of the log curve—its color, width, and line style. By using the toolbar, you can
also fill from the curve to the track edge and change the fill color.
Additional settings for showing points on the log curve, flipping the curve, and hiding the
log header are available in the Well Curve Attributes dialog box (Figure 3–19). The
dialog box has settings for other fill methods, including fill to a specific value and fill to
another log curve. For the fill style, you can choose a constant color or a gradient fill. The
gradient option fills the area with the color map of a specified log. You can also set fill
priority so that a curve fill overlaps another one when they intersect (in other words,
specify which curve fill appears in the foreground and which one appears in the
background). If you choose to fill the area with a color, you can apply a fill pattern—for
example, conglomerate, sandstone, or shale. For examples of the fill methods, patterns,
and fill priority, see Figure 3–17 and Figure 3–18.

Figure 3–17 Log curve fill

methods and patterns

Fill to track edge Fill to track edge Fill to specific value

(color fill) (gradient fill)

Fill to another curve Pattern fill: Pattern fill: shale

conglomerate

3-46 Visualizing Data in Log Displays GOCAD® 2009.1 User Guide

 Part
III

Visualization
Figure 3–18 Overlapping log curves by setting fill priority

z1
z 1
The fill for the yellow
curve is set at priority
1 (fill from curve to
minimum) and is
lower priority.

z2
z 2
The blue curve is set
at priority 2 (fill from
curve to minimum)
and is higher priority.
Therefore, the fill for
the blue curve
overlays the fill for
the yellow curve.

For more information, see:

• "To access display settings for a log curve in a track," page 3-47
• "Attribute toolbar for a log in a track," page 3-48
• "To change the line color, width, and pattern, of a log curve," page 3-49
• "To display points on a log curve," page 3-49
• "To flip a log curve," page 3-50
• "To fill from a log curve to the track edge with color, patterns, and specify fill
priority," page 3-50
• "To fill from a log curve to a value," page 3-51
• "To fill from a log curve to another curve," page 3-53
• "To show or hide the log header," page 3-54
Notes
• To adjust the appearance of a log in an interval track, you can edit the classification. For
information, see Part IV: Foundation Modeling , "Defining Classifications" on page 10-2.
• You can use log curves as boundaries for a log in an interval track. For more information, see
"To use curve boundaries in an interval track" on page 3-29.
• You can also edit log values in tracks by using the tools on the Well Curves toolbar. For
information, see Part IV: Foundation Modeling , "Editing a Well Log in a Cross Section or
Log Display" on page 7-10.

To access display ♦ Do one of the following in a log display view or cross section view:
settings for a log
curve in a track
• To open the Attribute toolbar, select the name of a log in the Objects tab or use
the object selector and point to the curve in the track. The Attribute toolbar for
the log appears at the bottom of the window.
– or –
• To open the Well Curves Attributes dialog box (see Figure 3–19), do one of the
following:

• On the Selection toolbar, click Object Selector , right-click the curve in

the track, and then click Well Curve Attributes.
• Select the Objects tab or Pillars Templates tab (depending on what you
want to work on), right-click the curve, and then click Well Curve
Attributes.

Rock & Fluid Canvas™ 2009 | Epos™ 4.0 3.7 Working with Logs in Tracks 3-47
Paradigm™

Figure 3–19 Log curve

Attributes

Attribute toolbar for

a log in a track

Log Curve Color. Specifies the color of the selected log curve. Click ,
and then click the color.

Width. Specifies the display width (in points) of the log curve.

Pattern. Specifies the line pattern (for example, solid, dash, dot) to use for
the log curve.

Fill Minimum. Fills from the log curve to the track edge, toward the

minimum log value. To specify the fill color, click next to the button, and
then click the color.
Note You can also fill curves using a value or another curve as a cutoff. For
information, see "To fill from a log curve to a value" on page 3-51 and "To fill from
a log curve to another curve" on page 3-53.

3-48 Visualizing Data in Log Displays GOCAD® 2009.1 User Guide

 Part
III

Visualization
Fill Maximum. Fills from the log curve to the edge of the track, toward the

maximum log value. To specify the fill color, click next to the button, and
then click the color.
Note You can also fill curves using a value or another curve as a cutoff. For
information, see "To fill from a log curve to a value" on page 3-51 and "To fill from
a log curve to another curve" on page 3-53.

To change the line ♦ Do any of the following:

color, width, and
Note For information about how to open the Attribute toolbar or Well Curve Attributes
pattern, of a log dialog box, see "To access display settings for a log curve in a track" on page 3-47.
curve

To Do this
Change the color of the log
curve On the Attribute toolbar for the log, click Log Curve Color ,
and then click the color.
– or –
1 In the Well Curve Attributes dialog box, click the color button
next to Log curve color, and then click the color.
2 Click OK to carry out the command and close the dialog box, or
click Apply to carry out the command and leave the dialog box
open.
Change the width of the On the Attribute toolbar for the log, in the Width box, select the
log curve width (in points) that you want.
– or –
1 In the Well Curve Attributes dialog box, in the Width box,
select the width (in points) that you want.
2 Click OK to carry out the command and close the dialog box, or
click Apply to carry out the command and leave the dialog box
open.
Change the pattern of the On the Attribute toolbar for the log, in the Pattern box, select the
log curve line pattern ( for example, solid, dash, or dot) you want use for the
log curve.
– or –
1 In the Well Curve Attributes dialog box, in the Pattern box,
select the line pattern that you want.
2 Click OK to carry out the command and close the dialog box, or
click Apply to carry out the command and leave the dialog box
open.

To display points on a Showing the points on a log curve makes it easier to edit the curve with tools on the Well
log curve Curves toolbar. For more information about editing a log curve, see Part IV: Foundation
Modeling, "Editing a Well Log in a Cross Section or Log Display" on page 7-10. For
information about how to open the Well Curve Attributes dialog box, see "To access
display settings for a log curve in a track" on page 3-47.
1 In the Well Curve Attributes dialog box, select the Symbol check box, and then
select the symbol you want in the box to the right.
2 If you want to change the symbol color, click the color button, and then click the
color.
3 Click OK to carry out the command and close the dialog box, or click Apply to carry
out the command and leave the dialog box open.

Rock & Fluid Canvas™ 2009 | Epos™ 4.0 3.7 Working with Logs in Tracks 3-49
Paradigm™

To flip a log curve You can flip the log curve so that the maximum value is on the left of the track and the
minimum value is on the right.
1 In the Well Curve Attributes dialog box, select the Flip check box.
Note For information about how to open the Well Curve Attributes dialog box, see "To
access display settings for a log curve in a track" on page 3-47.

2 Click OK to carry out the command and close the dialog box, or click Apply to carry
out the command and leave the dialog box open.

To change the scale ♦ In the Well Curve Attributes dialog box, do one of the following:
Note For information about how to open the Well Curve Attributes dialog box, see "To
access display settings for a log curve in a track" on page 3-47.

• To automatically set the scale for the best fit, select the Auto check box.
• To manually set the scale, specify the minimum and maximum values in the Min
and Max boxes.

To fill from a log You can fill from a log curve to the track edge (toward the minimum value, the maximum
curve to the track value, or both). For the fill style, you can define a color and a pattern—for example,
edge with color, conglomerate, sandstone, or shale. You can also set the priority to specify which curve fill
patterns, and specify is in the foreground (overlaps) when another curve intersects it.
fill priority You can use either the Attribute toolbar or the Well Curve Attributes dialog box, to fill
to the track edge; however, the setting to change the pattern and priority is available only
in the Well Curve Attributes dialog box. For examples, see Figure 3–17 and Figure 3–18
on page 3-47.
♦ Do any of the following:
Note For information about how to open the Attribute toolbar or Well Curve Attributes
dialog box, see "To access display settings for a log curve in a track" on page 3-47.

To Do this
Fill from curve toward the
minimum value, ending at 1 On the Attribute toolbar for the log, click Fill Minimum .
the track edge
2 If you want to change the fill color, click next to the button,
and then click the color.
– or –
1 In the Well Curve Attributes dialog box, select the Fill from
curve towards minimum check box, and then click End fill at
track edge.
2 If you want to fill the area with a color, click Constant. To change
the fill color, click color button, and then click the color. If you
want to use a pattern, in the Fill pattern box, select a pattern.
3 If you want to apply a gradient fill, click Gradient, and then
select the log whose property color map you want to fill the area
with.
4 In the Priority box, enter a value to specify the order the filled
curve appears in the track. The higher the number, the higher the
priority. For example, the filled curve set at priority 2 will overlay
the filled curve set at priority 1.
5 Click OK to carry out the command and close the dialog box, or
click Apply to carry out the command and leave the dialog box
open.
For an example of settings in the dialog box and results for the
constant fill style, see Figure 3–20. For an example of the gradient fill
style, see Figure 3–17.

3-50 Visualizing Data in Log Displays GOCAD® 2009.1 User Guide

 Part
III

Visualization
To Do this
Fill from curve toward the
maximum value, ending at 1 On the Attribute toolbar for the log, click Fill Maximum .
the track edge
2 If you want to change the fill color, click next to the button,
and then click the color.
– or –
1 In the Well Curve Attributes dialog box, select the Fill from
curve towards maximum check box, and then click End fill at
track edge.
2 If you want to fill the area with a color, click Constant. To change
the fill color, click the color button, and then click the color. If you
want to use a pattern, in the Fill pattern box, select a pattern.
3 If you want to apply a gradient fill, click Gradient, and then
select the log whose property color map you want to fill the area
with.
4 In the Priority box, enter a value to specify the order the filled
curve appears in the track. The higher the number, the higher the
priority. For example, the filled curve set at priority 2 will overlay
the filled curve set at priority 1.
5 Click OK to carry out the command and close the dialog box, or
click Apply to carry out the command and leave the dialog box
open.
For an example of settings in the dialog box and results for the
constant fill style, see Figure 3–21. For an example of the gradient fill
style, see Figure 3–17.

Figure 3–20 Fill from

curve to track edge
toward the minimum log
value and pattern

Figure 3–21 Fill from

curve to track edge
toward the maximum log
value and pattern

To fill from a log You can use the Well Curve Attributes dialog box to fill from a log curve to a specific
curve to a value value. For the fill style, you can define a color and a pattern—for example, conglomerate,
sandstone, or shale.

Rock & Fluid Canvas™ 2009 | Epos™ 4.0 3.7 Working with Logs in Tracks 3-51
Paradigm™

♦ Do any of the following:

Note For information about how to open the Well Curve Attributes dialog box, see "To
access display settings for a log curve in a track" on page 3-47.

To Do this
Fill from curve toward the 1 In the Well Curve Attributes dialog box, select the Fill from
minimum value, ending at a curve towards minimum check box, click End fill at value, and
specific value then type the value in the box.
2 If you want to fill the area with a color, click Constant. To change
the fill color, click the color button, and then click the color. If you
want to use a pattern, in the Fill pattern box, select a pattern.
3 If you want to apply a gradient fill, click Gradient, and then
select the log whose property color map you want to fill the area
with.
4 In the Priority box, enter a value to specify the order the filled
curve appears in the track. The higher the number, the higher the
priority. For example, the filled curve set at priority 2 will overlay
the filled curve set at priority 1
5 Click OK to carry out the command and close the dialog box, or
click Apply to carry out the command and leave the dialog box
open.
For an example of settings in the dialog box and results for the
constant fill style, see Figure 3–22. For an example of the gradient fill
style, see Figure 3–17.
Fill from curve toward the 1 In the Well Curve Attributes dialog box, select the Fill from
maximum value, ending at curve towards maximum check box, click End fill at value,
a specific value and then type the value in the box.
2 If you want to fill the area with a color, click Constant. To change
the fill color, click the color button, and then click the color. If you
want to use a pattern, in the Fill pattern box, select a pattern.
3 If you want to apply a gradient fill, click Gradient, and then
select the log whose property color map you want to fill the area
with.
4 In the Priority box, enter a value to specify the order the filled
curve appears in the track. The higher the number, the higher the
priority. For example, the filled curve set at priority 2 will overlay
the filled curve set at priority 1.
5 Click OK to carry out the command and close the dialog box, or
click Apply to carry out the command and leave the dialog box
open.
For an example of settings in the dialog box and results for the
constant fill style, see Figure 3–23. For an example of the gradient fill
style, see Figure 3–17.

Figure 3–22 Fill toward

the minimum value,
ending at a specific value

3-52 Visualizing Data in Log Displays GOCAD® 2009.1 User Guide

 Part
III

Visualization
Figure 3–23 Fill toward
the maximum value,
ending at a specific value

To fill from a log You can use the Well Curve Attributes dialog box to fill from the log curve to another
curve to another curve. For the fill style, you can define a color and a pattern—for example, conglomerate,
curve sandstone, or shale.
♦ Do any of the following:
Note For information about how to open the Well Curve Attributes dialog box, see "To
access display settings for a log curve in a track" on page 3-47.

To Do this
Fill from curve toward the 1 In the Well Curve Attributes dialog box, select the Fill from
minimum value, ending at curve towards minimum check box, click End fill at curve, and
another log curve then select the log curve.
2 If you want to fill the area with a color, click Constant. To change
the fill color, click the color button, and then click the color. If you
want to use a pattern, in the Fill pattern box, select a pattern.
3 If you want to apply a gradient fill, click Gradient, and then
select the log whose property color map you want to fill the area
with.
4 In the Priority box, enter a value to specify the order the filled
curve appears in the track. The higher the number, the higher the
priority. For example, the filled curve set at priority 2 will overlay
the filled curve set at priority 1.
5 Click OK to carry out the command and close the dialog box, or
click Apply to carry out the command and leave the dialog box
open.
For an example of settings in the dialog box and results for the
constant fill style, see Figure 3–24. For an example of the gradient fill
style, see Figure 3–17.
Fill from curve toward the 1 In the Well Curve Attributes dialog box, select the Fill from
maximum value, ending at curve towards maximum check box, click End fill at curve,
another log curve and then select the log curve.
2 If you want to fill the area with a color, click Constant. To change
the fill color, click the color button, and then click the color. If you
want to use a pattern, in the Fill pattern box, select a pattern.
3 If you want to apply a gradient fill, click Gradient, and then
select the log whose property color map you want to fill the area
with.
4 In the Priority box, enter a value to specify the order the filled
curve appears in the track. The higher the number, the higher the
priority. For example, the filled curve set at priority 2 will overlay
the filled curve set at priority 1.
5 Click OK to carry out the command and close the dialog box, or
click Apply to carry out the command and leave the dialog box
open.
For an example of settings in the dialog box and results for the
constant fill style, see Figure 3–25. For an example of the gradient fill
style, see Figure 3–17.

Rock & Fluid Canvas™ 2009 | Epos™ 4.0 3.7 Working with Logs in Tracks 3-53
Paradigm™

Figure 3–24 Fill to a curve

toward the minimum
value

The fill is from the porosity log curve (light blue) to the gamma ray log curve (navy blue), toward the
minimum log value. The specified curve becomes the minimum extent of the fill.

Figure 3–25 Fill to a curve

toward the maximum
value

The fill is from the porosity log curve (light blue) to the gamma ray log curve (navy blue), toward the
maximum log value. The specified curve becomes the maximum extent of the fill.

To show or hide the A log header for each displayed log appears by default above log tracks. The log header
log header includes the name of the log and minimum and maximum values. For an example, see
Figure 3–26. The color and pattern of the header match that of the log.
1 Right-click the log in the Objects tab or in the tracks, and then click Track
Attributes to open the dialog box.
2 Select or clear the Visible check box under Header.
3 Click OK to carry out the command and close the dialog box, or click Apply to carry
out the command and leave the dialog box open.

Figure 3–26 Log headers

3-54 Visualizing Data in Log Displays GOCAD® 2009.1 User Guide

 Part
III

Visualization
3.8 Working with Well Markers in Tracks
When you create a log display view (or a cross section view that has pillars associated with
wells), existing well markers automatically appear in the Objects tab under the name of
the pillar.
You can create and apply a template to standardize the markers for all the pillars, or you
can adjust the markers on pillars individually. For information about how to create and
apply a template, see "Creating and Working with Pillar Templates" on page 3-61.
You can work with markers on individual pillars the same way in the Log Display window
and the Cross Section window. You can show or hide the well markers and control
whether the name appears above the marker.
For information, see:
• "To show or hide markers in tracks," page 3-55
• "To show or hide a marker name from the attribute toolbar," page 3-55
• "To show or hide and position the marker name and depth from Attributes,"
page 3-56
Notes
• For information about basic commands for well markers, for example, to create a marker and
add it to a marker set, see Part IV: Foundation Modeling , "Creating and Editing Well Markers
and Marker Sets" on page 7-14.
• If you have the Well Correlation and Stratigraphic Analysis module loaded in your project, you
can also use the Well Picks toolbar to create a marker, edit a marker, and flatten to a marker.
And, you can use the Marker Editor to add, remove, and edit markers in tracks and change
their appearance. For more information, see Part VII: Geologic Interpretation, Chapter 2,
"Interpreting and Correlating Well Data."

To show or hide ♦ Do any of the following:

markers in tracks
• To show all or hide all markers in the tracks for a pillar, expand the name of the
pillar on the Objects tab, right-click markers, and then click Show All or Hide
All.
• To show or hide an individual marker, expand the name of the pillar in the
Objects tab, expand markers, and then select or clear the check box next to the
marker name.

To show or hide a 1 In the Log Display or Cross Section window, click the name of a marker in the
marker name from Objects tab or click the marker in the tracks. The Attribute toolbar for the marker is
the attribute toolbar displayed at the bottom of the window.

2 On the Attribute toolbar, use Show/Hide Marker Name to turn the name on
or off.

Rock & Fluid Canvas™ 2009 | Epos™ 4.0 3.8 Working with Well Markers in Tracks 3-55
Paradigm™

To show or hide and 1 In the Log Display window or Cross Section window, right-click the marker in the
position the marker Objects tab or in the pillar, and then click Marker Attributes to open the dialog
name and depth from box.
Attributes

2 Select the Visible check box to show the marker in the track. Select the font and font
size for the marker name and depth value.
3 To show the marker name in the pillar, select the Visible check box.
4 If the color behind the marker makes the marker name unreadable, select the White
Background check box.
5 If the marker name is long, you can position it accordingly so that it is readable.
Under Placement select left, center, or right for the Horizontal position and top or
bottom for the Vertical position.
6 To show the marker depth value in the pillars, under Marker Depth, select the
Visible check box.
7 If the color behind the marker depth value makes the value unreadable, select the
White Background check box.
8 If the marker depth value is unreadable because of a long marker name, you can
position it accordingly so that it is readable. Under Placement select left, center, or
right for the Horizontal position and top or bottom for the Vertical position.
9 Click OK to carry out the command and close the dialog box, or click Apply to carry
out the command and leave the dialog box open.

3-56 Visualizing Data in Log Displays GOCAD® 2009.1 User Guide

 Part
III

Visualization
3.9 Changing the Log Display Layout
In a log display view, you can change the domain for displaying measurements along the
vertical axis of each track. For example, you can change the domain from measured depth
(MD) to TVDSS (true vertical depth subsea or two-way traveltime, depending on whether
the objects in your log display view are in depth or time) and vice versa. Converting to a
different domain changes the measurements along the vertical axes of all the tracks.
You can also show correlation tracks between pillars in a log display view and change the
correlation track width. For an explanation of correlation tracks, see "Components of a
Log Display" on page 3-5.
Lastly, you can choose whether to show or hide the well name and well status in the pillar
header and adjust the font, size, and color of the pillar and log headers.
For information, see:
• "To convert logs to TVDSS or MD," page 3-57
• "To show a correlation track between pillars and change the layout," page 3-58
• "To change the appearance of the pillar header," page 3-59
• "To change the appearance of text in the log header," page 3-59

To convert logs to 1 In the log display view view, right-click the header area above the tracks, and then
TVDSS or MD click Attributes to open the dialog box.

Tip The tools for converting 2 On the Layout tab, do one of the following:
logs to TVDSS or MD are
also available on the • To convert all logs to TVDSS (if your objects are in depth) or to two-way
Log Display toolbar.
traveltime (if your objects are in time), click TVDSS .

• To convert all logs to measured depth, click MD .

• To convert all logs to two way time, click TWT .

3 Click OK to carry out the command and close the dialog box, or click Apply to carry
out the command and leave the dialog box open.

Rock & Fluid Canvas™ 2009 | Epos™ 4.0 3.9 Changing the Log Display Layout 3-57
Paradigm™

To show a correlation Note For more information about well correlation, see Part VII: Geologic Interpretation,
track between pillars "Interpreting and Correlating Well Data," page 2-1
and change the 1 Display the markers you want to correlate between pillars. You must display the
layout marker on each pillar.
2 In the log display view view, right-click the header area, and then click Attributes to
open the dialog box.

Tip You can also click 3 On the Layout tab, select the Visible check box under Correlation tracks.
Correlation Tracks on 4 If you want to increase or decrease the width of the correlation track, move the
the Log Display toolbar to Minimum width slider. Valid values are from 0.5 to 4 inches.
show or hide correlation
tracks. 5 If you want the log display view to reflect the distance between wells, select the
Width relative to well spacing check box. If you do not select this, the space
between logs is the same for all wells.
6 Click OK to carry out the command and close the dialog box, or click Apply to carry
out the command and leave the dialog box open.
A track appears between each pillar. Straight correlation lines are drawn between pillars
that have the same markers.
Notes

• If a marker is not visible in pillars next to each other, a correlation line will not be drawn in the
track.
• The command uses a top-to-bottom analysis to associate markers if more than one marker on
the pillars identifies the same geologic feature. For example, if there are two markers
identifying the same geologic feature on each pillar, the marker with the least measured depth
on the first pillar will be associated with the marker with the least measured depth on the
second pillar.
• If you switch between MD or TVDSS or flatten to a marker, the correlation track updates
automatically

3-58 Visualizing Data in Log Displays GOCAD® 2009.1 User Guide

 Part
III

Visualization
To change the 1 In the log display view, right-click the header area, and then click Attributes to open
appearance of the the dialog box.
pillar header 2 Do any of the following to change the appearance of the pillar header:
• To change the appearance of the text in the pillar header, select the font, size,
and color you want.
• To show or hide the name of the well that is associated with the pillar, select or
clear the Show well name check box.
• To show or hide the status of the well that is associated with the pillar, select or
clear the Show well status check box.
3 Click OK to carry out the command and close the dialog box, or click Apply to carry
out the command and leave the dialog box open.

To change the 1 In the log display view, right-click the header area, and then click Attributes to open
appearance of text in the dialog box.
the log header 2 To change the appearance of the text in the log header, select the font, size, and
color you want.
3 Click OK to carry out the command and close the dialog box, or click Apply to carry
out the command and leave the dialog box open.

Rock & Fluid Canvas™ 2009 | Epos™ 4.0 3.9 Changing the Log Display Layout 3-59
Paradigm™

3.10 Exporting Logs to a CSV File

You can export all logs displayed in the tracks to a comma-separated values (CSV) file.
CSV files are ASCII text files readable in spreadsheet and relational database applications
such as Microsoft Excel.

To export logs to a
1 On the Log Display toolbar, click Microsoft Excel Output to open the Output
CSV file
CSV File dialog box.

2 Do one of the following:

• To save the file in the default location, type a name with a .csv extension in the
Output file box.

• To save the file to a different location, click , find and select the folder where
you want to save the file, type the name of the file in the File name box, and
then click Save.
3 Click OK to carry out the command and close the dialog box, or click Apply to carry
out the command and leave the dialog box open.
Note The information in the Advanced area of the dialog box is used internally to carry contextual
information. We recommend that you do not change it.

3-60 Visualizing Data in Log Displays GOCAD® 2009.1 User Guide

 Part
III

Visualization
3.11 Creating and Working with Pillar
Templates
You can create and use pillar templates to apply consistent track settings to pillars in a
log display view or cross section view. Using a pillar template is more efficient than setting
up the tracks, well logs, and well markers on each pillar separately.
The Template column in the Objects tab indicates whether a template controls the
settings for a pillar or whether the settings are individual. Figure 3–27 shows an example
of a log display view in which one template is applied to the first two pillars, another
template is applied to the third pillar, and the fourth pillar has no template applied.

Figure 3–27 Log Display with templates applied

You can use the template to:

• Change the type, number, and appearance of tracks
• Display logs in tracks and change their appearance
• Display well markers in tracks and turn on or off the marker labels
You can create a template using several methods and then apply it to any pillar in the
Log Display window or Cross Section window.
You can use the Track Editor to edit all aspects of the track settings in both templates
and pillars including changing the order of the tracks. For more information, see
"Changing Track Settings with the Track Editor," page 3-20. You can also use the Well
Curve Attributes dialog box to change how the curves appear (such as colors, styles, and
fill patterns) in both templates and pillars. For more information, see "Changing Graphic
Attributes of Log Curves in Tracks" on page 3-46.

Rock & Fluid Canvas™ 2009 | Epos™ 4.0 3.11 Creating and Working with Pillar Templates 3-61
Paradigm™

For information, see:

• "Creating a Pillar Template," page 3-62
• "Creating Well Curve Name Aliases," page 3-63
• "Adding or Removing Tracks in a Pillar Template," page 3-65
• "Changing Display Attributes of Tracks in a Pillar Template," page 3-65
• "Working with Logs in a Pillar Template," page 3-66
• "Working with Markers in a Pillar Template," page 3-68
• "Applying a Template to Pillars," page 3-69
• "Managing Pillar Templates," page 3-70

3.11.1 Creating a Pillar Template

You can create a template manually from scratch, create a template from a pillar in a
log display view or cross section view, or create a new template by copying an existing
template. You can also import a template if one was exported from another project to
XML.
When you create a pillar template, it is listed in the Pillar Templates tab in both a
log display view and cross section view. You can create it in either window.
For information, see:
• "To create a new template manually," page 3-62
• "To create a template from a pillar," page 3-62
• "To import a template exported to XML," page 3-63
• "To create a template by copying," page 3-63

To create a new 1 In a log display view or cross section view, click the Pillar Templates tab, right-click
template manually Templates, and then click Add Template. A new template named #nn_Template
appears in the list.
2 Do any of the following:
• Add tracks to the template—for information, see "Adding or Removing Tracks in
a Pillar Template" on page 3-65.
• Change the appearance of the tracks—for information, see "Changing Display
Attributes of Tracks in a Pillar Template" on page 3-65.
• Add logs to tracks and change their appearance, for information, see "Working
with Logs in a Pillar Template" on page 3-66.
• Add markers to tracks and control whether to show or hide the marker name, see
"Working with Markers in a Pillar Template" on page 3-68.
When you are finished setting up the template the way you want it, you can apply it to
pillars in a log display view or cross section view. For information, see "Applying a
Template to Pillars" on page 3-69.

To create a template An effective way to create a template is to set up an individual pillar the way you want it,
from a pillar and then copy the pillar settings into a template.
1 In a log display view or cross section view, right-click the pillar in the Objects tab,
and then click Copy into Template.
2 In the Template name box, type a name for the new template.

3-62 Visualizing Data in Log Displays GOCAD® 2009.1 User Guide

 Part
III

Visualization
3 Click OK to carry out the command and close the dialog box, or click Apply to carry
out the command and leave the dialog box open.
Note The information in the Advanced area of the dialog box is used internally to carry contextual
information. We recommend that you do not change it.

The command creates a template based on the pillar settings and adds it to the list in the
Pillar Templates tab.

To import a template 1 In a log display view or cross section view, click the Pillar Templates tab, right-click
exported to XML Templates, and then click Import Template to open the Import Template dialog
box.
2 Find and select the template you want to import, and then click Open.
The template appears in the list.

To create a template If an existing template has settings you want to reuse, you can copy it and then make
by copying changes in the new template.
♦ In a log display view or cross section view, click the Pillar Templates tab, right-click
the name of the existing template you want to copy, and then click Copy Template.
A new template named Copy of TemplateName appears in the list.

3.11.2 Creating Well Curve Name Aliases

You can use the Well Curve Name Alias Editor to create aliases for well curves that
were created in Geolog. This can be done only in the pillar templates. Once your work is
completed, you can then save the aliases to a file to use in Geolog or other GOCAD
projects.

Figure 3–28 Well Curve

Name Aliases Editor

Rock & Fluid Canvas™ 2009 | Epos™ 4.0 3.11 Creating and Working with Pillar Templates 3-63
Paradigm™

To create well curve 1 In a log display view or cross section view, click the Pillar Templates tab, right-click
aliases Templates, and then click Well Curve Alias Editor to open the dialog box.

2 Click to select the template that you want to which you want to apply the aliases.

3 If you want to import an existing alias file from Geolog (filename.aliases), click to
open the dialog box, find and select the file, and then click Open. The aliases are
loaded into the main table (the table on the left).
4 If you want to add aliases manually, do the following:

a Click to add a row to the main table.

b Click in the Curve Name box and type the name of the curve used in GOCAD.
c Click in the Curve Aliases box and type the name of the curve used in Geolog.

5 To delete an alias, select the alias in the main table and click .
6 To add or delete multiple aliases to a single curve name, do the following:
a Select the alias in the main table. The curve and its aliases are listed in the Edit
table (the table on the right side).

b Click to add a row to the Edit table.

c Click in the row in the Edit table and type the alias name.
d Repeat this sub-procedure until all alias names have been added.
e If you want to delete an alias name, select the alias name in the Edit table and

click .
f If you want to, you can use the arrow buttons to reorder the alias names.

7 If you want to save the aliases to file and use it in other projects, click to open
the dialog box, navigate to the folder you want to store the file in, type the file name
in the File name box, and then click Save.
8 Click OK to carry out the command and close the dialog box, or click Apply to carry
out the command and leave the dialog box open.

3-64 Visualizing Data in Log Displays GOCAD® 2009.1 User Guide

 Part
III

Visualization
3.11.3 Adding or Removing Tracks in a Pillar
Template
For information about how to add or remove tracks in a template, see:
• "To add a track in a template," page 3-65
• "To remove a track in a template," page 3-65

To add a track in a ♦ In a log display view or cross section view, click the Pillar Templates tab, right-click
template the template you want to add the track to, and then do any of the following:
• To add a scale track, click Add Scale Track.
• To add a log track, click Add Log Track.
• To add an interval track, click Add Interval Track.
• To add a stratigraphy track, click Add Stratigraphy Track.
• To add a chronostratigraphy track, click Add Chronostratigraphy Track.
• To add a seismic track, click Add Seismic Track.
• To add a synthetic track, click Add Synthetic Track.
• To add a schematic track, click Add Schematic Track
Important Add the tracks in the order that you want them to appear.

To remove a track in a ♦ Right-click the track that you want to remove from the template, and then click
template Remove Track.

3.11.4 Changing Display Attributes of Tracks in a

Pillar Template
You can change the track display attributes in a template by using settings available in the
Attributes dialog box.

To change display 1 In a log display view or cross section view, click the Pillar Templates tab, expand the
attributes of a track template, right-click the track whose attributes you want to change, and then click
in a template Attributes to open the dialog box.
2 Change the settings, which vary according to the type of track. For detailed
information, see:
• "Changing the Appearance of a Scale Track," page 3-21
• "Changing the Appearance of a Log Track," page 3-24
• "Changing the Appearance of an Interval Track," page 3-27
• "Changing the Appearance of a Stratigraphy or Chronostratigraphy Track,"
page 3-30
• "Changing the Appearance of a Seismic Track," page 3-31
• "Changing the Appearance of a Synthetic Track," page 3-34
• "Changing the Appearance of a Schematic Track," page 3-36

Rock & Fluid Canvas™ 2009 | Epos™ 4.0 3.11 Creating and Working with Pillar Templates 3-65
Paradigm™

3.11.5 Working with Logs in a Pillar Template

You can add well logs and external logs to a template. All added logs or curves are shown
by default, but you can control which ones to show or hide. Any log or external log you
add to a template can be removed. For more information about external logs, see
"Adding or Removing an External Log in a Log Display," page 3-41.
You can change the attributes for a log display view in a template by using the Attribute
toolbar and the Attributes dialog box, just as you would for an individual pillar (a pillar
without a template).
For information, see:
• "To add an external log to a log track in a template," page 3-66
• "To add a log to an interval track in a template," page 3-67
• "To remove a log from a template," page 3-67
• "To show logs or lithology in a template track," page 3-67
• "To hide logs or lithology in a template track," page 3-67
• "To change log attributes in a template," page 3-68

To add an external 1 In a log display view or cross section view, click the Pillar Templates tab, expand the
log to a log track in a name of the template in the list, right-click the log track, and then click Add Log to
template open the dialog box.

2 Do one of the following:

• To add one or more curves from a stratigraphic grid, click from SGrid, enter the
stratigraphic grid in the Stratigraphic grid name box, enter the properties you
want to add to the track in the SGrid property box, and then, in the Method
box, select the method that you want to use for extracting the properties from
the grid cells along the well path.
For information about the available methods, see "Methods for extracting a
curve from a stratigraphic grid" on page 3-44.
• To add one or more curves from a voxet, click from Voxet, enter the voxet in the
Voxet name box, and then enter the properties you want to add to the track in
the Voxet property box.
• To add one or more curves from a well, click from Well, enter the well in the
Well name box, and then enter the properties you want to add to the track in
the Well property box.
3 Do one of the following, depending on what you want to happen when you apply the
template to a pillar:

3-66 Visualizing Data in Log Displays GOCAD® 2009.1 User Guide

 Part
III

Visualization
• If you want to display the log or curve if the pillar already has one with that
name, select the Property only check box.
• If you want to extract the property from the selected object, clear the Property
only check box. In this case, the curve will be computed, named with the
convention PropertyName (SourceObjectName), and displayed.
4 Click OK to carry out the command and close the dialog box, or click Apply to carry
out the command and leave the dialog box open.
Note The information in the Advanced area of the dialog box is used internally to carry contextual
information. We recommend that you do not change it.

The logs or curves appear in the template, listed under the log track. When you apply the
template, the result depends on whether you selected the Property only check box (see
step 3).

To add a log to an Adding logs to an interval track is similar to adding them to a log track. The list of
interval track in a properties from which you can choose is narrowed, however, to discrete properties—for
template example, facies interpretations and simulated facies properties—that are appropriate for
display in an interval track.
1 In a log display view or cross section view, click the Pillar Templates tab, expand the
template, right-click the interval track, and then click Add Interval Log to open the
Add Interval Log in Template Track dialog box.
2 Complete step 2 through step 4 in "To add an external log to a log track in a
template" on page 3-66.
The logs or curves appear in the template, listed under the interval track. When you apply
the template, the result depends on whether you selected the Property only check box
(see step 3 in "To add an external log to a log track in a template" on page 3-66).

To remove a log from ♦ In a log display view or cross section view, click the Pillar Templates tab, expand the
a template template and the track from which you want to remove the log, right-click the name
of the log, and then click Remove Log.
This command removes the log from the template but does not delete the log from the
project.

To show logs or ♦ In a log display view or cross section view, click the Pillar Templates tab, expand the
lithology in a template and the log track or interval track, and then select the check box next to
template track each log or lithology you want to show in the track.
The selected logs appear in the track on all pillars to which the template is applied.

To hide logs or ♦ In a log display view or cross section view, click the Pillar Templates tab, expand the
lithology in a template and the log track or interval track, and then clear the check box next to
template track each log or lithology you want to hide in the track.
The selected logs do not appear in the track on any pillars to which the template is
applied.

Rock & Fluid Canvas™ 2009 | Epos™ 4.0 3.11 Creating and Working with Pillar Templates 3-67
Paradigm™

To change log 1 In a log display view or cross section view, click the Pillar Templates tab, and then
attributes in a expand the template and the log track that has the log whose attributes you want to
template change.
2 Do any of the following:
• To change basic attributes such as the color, width, and pattern of the log curve,
click the name of the log in the template to open the Attribute toolbar, and then
change the settings.
• To change advanced attributes, right-click a log in the template and click
Attributes to open the dialog box, and then change the settings.
Note Changing the log color in a template does not affect the color of the log when displayed
in the 3D Viewer.

For more information, see:

• "To change the line color, width, and pattern, of a log curve," page 3-49.
• "To display points on a log curve," page 3-49
• "To flip a log curve," page 3-50
• "To fill from a log curve to the track edge with color, patterns, and specify fill
priority," page 3-50
• "To fill from a log curve to a value," page 3-51
• "To fill from a log curve to another curve," page 3-53
• "To show or hide the log header," page 3-54

3.11.6 Working with Markers in a Pillar Template

You can add any well markers in your project to the template. Any marker that you add
can be removed. You can also control whether to show or hide each marker in the tracks
and whether to display the marker name.
For information, see:
• "To add markers to a template," page 3-68
• "To remove a marker from a template," page 3-68
• "To show markers in a template," page 3-69
• "To hide markers in a template," page 3-69
• "To show or hide a marker name in a template," page 3-69

To add markers to a 1 In a log display view or cross section view, click the Pillar Templates tab, expand the
template template, right-click markers, and then click Add Marker to open the dialog.
2 In the Marker name box, enter the markers you want to add to the template.
3 Click OK to carry out the command and close the dialog box, or click Apply to carry
out the command and leave the dialog box open.
Note The information in the Advanced area of the dialog box is used internally to carry contextual
information. We recommend that you do not change it.

To remove a marker ♦ In a log display view or cross section view, click the Pillar Templates tab, expand the
from a template template, expand markers, right-click the name of the marker, and then click
Remove Marker.
This command removes the marker from the template but does not delete the marker
from the project.

3-68 Visualizing Data in Log Displays GOCAD® 2009.1 User Guide

 Part
III

Visualization
To show markers in a ♦ In a log display view or cross section view, click the Pillar Templates tab, expand the
template template, and then do any of the following:
• To show all markers, right-click markers, and then click Show All.
• To show an individual marker, expand markers, and then select the check box
next to the marker name.
The selected markers appear in tracks on all pillars to which the template is applied.

To hide markers in a ♦ In a log display view or cross section view, click the Pillar Templates tab, expand the
template template, and then do any of the following:
• To hide all markers, right-click markers, and then click Hide All.
• To hide an individual marker, expand markers, and then clear the check box next
to the marker name.
The selected markers do not appear in tracks on any pillars to which the template is
applied.

To show or hide a 1 In a log display view or cross section view, click the Pillar Templates tab, expand the
marker name in a template, and then click the name of a marker. The Attribute toolbar for the marker
template is displayed at the bottom of the window.

2 In the Attribute toolbar, use Show/Hide Marker Name to turn the name on or
off.

3.11.7 Applying a Template to Pillars

After you finish setting up the template the way you want it, you can apply it to any
pillars in a log display view or cross section view. You can apply the template while
working in either the Objects tab or the Pillar Templates tab.
If you later decide that you want to use individual settings instead of the template, you
can change the template setting back to "none."
For information, see:
• "To apply a template to pillars," page 3-69
• "To revert to individual pillar settings," page 3-70

To apply a template 1 Do one of the following in a cross section view or log display view that you want to
to pillars apply the template to:
• If you are working in the Pillar Templates tab, right-click the name of the
template that you want to apply to one or more pillars, and then click Apply
Template to Pillars to open the dialog box.
• If you are working in the Objects tab, right-click the pillar that you want to apply
a template to, and then click Apply Template to open the dialog box.
2 In the Template name box, select the template you want to apply.
3 In the Pillar name box, enter the pillars to which you want to apply the template.

Rock & Fluid Canvas™ 2009 | Epos™ 4.0 3.11 Creating and Working with Pillar Templates 3-69
Paradigm™

4 Click OK to carry out the command and close the dialog box, or click Apply to carry
out the command and leave the dialog box open.
Note The information in the Advanced area of the dialog box is used internally to carry contextual
information. We recommend that you do not change it.

To revert to individual ♦ Complete the steps in the previous procedure, "To apply a template to pillars" on
pillar settings page 3-69, except in step 2 select None in the Template name box.

3.11.8 Managing Pillar Templates

You can delete a template, rename a template, and export a template to XML for use in
other projects.
For information, see:
• "To delete a template," page 3-70
• "To rename a template," page 3-70
• "To export a template to XML," page 3-70

To delete a template ♦ On the Pillar Templates tab, right-click the template you want to delete from the
project, and then click Delete Template.

To rename a template 1 On the Pillar Templates tab, right-click the template you want to rename to open
the Rename Template dialog box.
2 In the New Template name box, type the name.
3 Click OK to carry out the command and close the dialog box, or click Apply to carry
out the command and leave the dialog box open.

To export a template If you export a template to XML, you can then import it into other projects. (For
to XML information about how to import a template, see "To import a template exported to
XML" on page 3-63.)
1 On the Pillar Templates tab, right-click the template you want to export to open the
Export Template dialog box.
2 Find and select the folder you want to save the file in.
3 In the File name box, type a name for the file. You do not need to type a filename
extension.
4 Click Save.

3-70 Visualizing Data in Log Displays GOCAD® 2009.1 User Guide

 4
Visualizing Data in Maps

In this chapter • "Creating a Map," page 4-2 • "Visualizing Features on a Map,"

page 4-43
• "Map Window Quick Tour,"
page 4-15 • "Editing Map View Settings,"
page 4-44
• "Opening an Existing Map View,"
page 4-17 • "Measuring Distances and Areas on a
Map," page 4-45
• "Visualizing Objects and Properties on
a Map," page 4-18 • "Editing Maps," page 4-48

• "Visualizing Maps in the 3D Viewer,"

page 4-38

Overview These topics explain how to create and work with maps.

4-1
Paradigm™

4.1 Creating a Map

You can create a map in several ways. One way is by using the Create Map dialog box,
which offers several creation methods, including digitizing and creating a horizontal plane
through selected objects. This method is useful if you want to create a map that covers
the areal extent of multiple objects.
In addition, you can create contour maps directly from various types of data. These
commands create a contour map from a surface. This map displays a property that you
select, as well as contour lines. You can create contour maps from any of the following
sources:
• A property of a surface or 2D grid. For this method, you use a shortcut command
available on the property for which you want to create the map.
• The average and/or total well log properties for the pay zones of selected
wells. This method is useful when you have isolated a reservoir that you think
contains exploitable quantities of hydrocarbons and you want to analyze it using a
map. With this method, you use a wizard to compute a pay zone along selected wells
based on cut-off values for logs. Then you compute the map of average and/or total
well log properties.
• Well markers. This method uses all well markers in the project that have the name
that you specify to build a 2D grid. It fits the 2D grid to the well markers and then
creates a map that displays depth contour lines and the depth property according to
the color map.
• Well markers and stratigraphic units. This method calculates the thickness of the
stratigraphic unit between the two well markers that define the top and bottom of
the unit. You specify the stratigraphic unit from which you want to create the map.
The command calculates the true vertical thickness (TVT) of the stratigraphic unit
between the two markers that define the top and bottom of the unit, interpolating
the values between the wells.
• PointsSet object. This method uses all points in a point set and grid and displays
contours for the selected property. If you do not specify a property, it displays
contours for depth.
For information, see the following topics:
• "To create a map from objects," page 4-3
• "To create a contour map from a surface property," page 4-5
• "To create a contour map from a 2D grid property," page 4-6
• "To create a contour map from computed pay zones," page 4-6
• "To create a map from a surface," page 4-11
• "To create a map from a 2D grid," page 4-11
• "To create a contour map from well markers," page 4-12
• "To create a contour map from well markers and stratigraphic units," page 4-12
• "To create a contour map from PointsSet objects," page 4-14

4-2 Visualizing Data in Maps GOCAD® 2009.1 User Guide

 Part
III

Visualization
To create a map from 1 In the Object Tree, right-click Map, and then click From Objects to open the dialog
objects box.

2 In the Map name box, type a name for the map. The name must follow the rules in
Part I: Getting Started, "Naming Objects" on page 3-7.
3 Use one of the map creation tools to define the dimensions and location of the map.

To Do this
Define map extremities
by digitizing Click Draw Map , and then drag a rectangle in the 3D Viewer.
The values in the Left, Right, Bottom, and Top boxes update
automatically to the extent of the rectangle. The value in the Datum
box updates to the z value of the rectangle's origin.
Note You can digitize in an empty area of the 3D Viewer, and the map
will still slice through any data in that location, whether the object is
visible in the 3D Viewer or not.
Define map extremities
and datum from object Click Create Map from Selected Objects , and then enter the
selection objects in the Define Map Dimension dialog box.
The values in the Left, Right, Bottom, and Top boxes update
automatically so that the map covers the extension of the selected
objects. The value in the Datum box updates to the middle z value of
the bounding box containing all selected objects.
Define map extremities In the 3D Viewer, display the objects that you want to use to define
and datum from shown
objects the map extremities, and then click Estimate .
The values in the Left, Right, Bottom, and Top boxes update
automatically so that the map covers the extension of the shown
objects, rounded up to the nearest whole number. The value in the
Datum box updates to the middle z value of the bounding box
containing all displayed objects.

Rock & Fluid Canvas™ 2009 | Epos™ 4.0 4.1 Creating a Map 4-3
Paradigm™

4 Optionally, edit the map extremities:

• Left. Defines the location of the left side of the map (minimum value in the x
direction).
• Right. Defines the location of the right side of the map (maximum value in the x
direction).
• Bottom. Defines the location of the bottom of the map (minimum value in the y
direction).
• Top. Defines the location of the top of the map (maximum value in the y
direction).
Note Data values are expressed in the unit of measure selected when you created the project.

5 Optionally, in the Datum box, edit the time or depth of the map (z value). For
information about how the datum was derived, see step 3.
Note Whether the map is in the time domain or the depth domain depends on the object on
which you digitized or the objects from which you created the map.

6 Do one of the following:

Tip You can change the • If you want all objects whose bounding box is above or below the map plane to
maximum projection be available for projection onto the map, clear the Use datum projection
distance later by using the
Change Dimensions dialog
distance check box.
box. For information, see
• If you want to specify a maximum projection distance, select the Use datum
"Editing Map View Settings"
on page 4-44.
projection distance check box, and then type a value specifying the vertical
limitation that you want to impose for projecting objects onto the map.
Only objects whose bounding box fall within that distance above or below the
map plane will become available for projection onto the map. If objects are
farther away, they will not be available.
Note With the exception of a PointsSet object, if any of the object is within the distance,
the entire object will be projected. For a point set, any points that are too far away will not
be projected. For information about the objects you can project on a map, see "Visualizing
Objects and Properties on a Map" on page 4-18.

7 To check the dimensions of the map before you create it, see the information in the X
dimension and the Y dimension boxes. These values are calculated automatically;
you cannot edit them.
• X dimension. This value is the width of the map. It is the difference between the
specified right and left values.
• Y dimension. This value is the length of the map. It is the difference between
the specified top and bottom values.
8 If you want to control the size for displaying and printing the map, do any of the
following in the Map scale and paper size area.

4-4 Visualizing Data in Maps GOCAD® 2009.1 User Guide

 Part
III

Visualization
To Do this
Change the scale In the Map scale box, enter the number of units in the map that you
want to include per inch or centimeter of paper.
When you change the scale, the values for Map paper size (the size
of the paper that is needed to print the map data at the current
scale) adjust automatically.
Important Specifying the map scale controls the size of the map
data only. The width and height values under Map paper size do
not account for the margin around the map, the scale, property color
bars, or the legend that you might add to the map. Before printing,
you can view the total paper size in the Dimension Settings dialog
box and make adjustments if needed. For more information, see
"Editing Map View Settings" on page 4-44.
Change the units for In the Paper unit box, select cm (centimeters) or in (inches).
display and printing
Define the scale value from
the objects being used to Click Estimate .
create the map The value in the Map scale box updates automatically to ensure that
the map fits a standard A4 size page.

Notes
• Accepted values for the scale and paper size are positive numbers with precision up to the
thousandth decimal place.
• The size of the map data on your screen will equal the values in the Map paper size boxes
if the resolution of your screen is 72 dots per inch.

9 When you are finished, click Apply to create the map.

When you create a map, the following occurs:
• The Map window opens and displays the map. For an overview of this window, see
"Map Window Quick Tour" on page 4-15.
• In the Object Tree, the name of the map appears in the Map list.
Tip You can create more • A new view is created in the project. For more information about views, see "Opening
than one view of the same an Existing Map View" on page 4-17.
map by opening a new Map
window. For information, Note If you change the settings in the Create Map dialog box and then click Apply again, the
see "Opening a New 2D command creates another map and opens another Map window. If you do not change the name,
Window" on page 1-11. the command adds _ n to the name, where n starts with zero.

To create a contour ♦ In the Object Tree, expand Surface, expand the name of the surface for which you
map from a surface want to create a contour map of a property, expand properties, right-click the name
property of the property for which you want to create a contour map, and then click Create
Contour Map.
– or –
1 In the 3D Viewer, display the surface property that you want to use to create the
map.
2 Hold down CTRL, right-click the surface property, and then click Create Map.
When you create a map from a surface property, the following occurs:
• The Map window opens and displays the contour map. For an overview of this
window, see "Map Window Quick Tour" on page 4-15.

Rock & Fluid Canvas™ 2009 | Epos™ 4.0 4.1 Creating a Map 4-5
Paradigm™

• In the Object Tree, the map appears in the Map list. The naming convention is
Map_SurfaceName (if you create more than one map from the same surface, the
command adds _ n to the name, where n starts with zero).
Tip You can create more • A new view is created in the project. For more information about views, see "Opening
than one view of the same
an Existing Map View" on page 4-17.
map by opening a new Map
window. For information,
see "Opening a New 2D
Window" on page 1-11.

To create a contour ♦ In the Object Tree, expand 2D-Grid, expand the name of the gridded surface for
map from a 2D grid which you want to create a contour map of a property, expand properties, right-click
property the name of the property for which you want to create a contour map, and then click
Create Map.
– or –
1 In the 3D Viewer, display the grid property that you want to use to create the map.
2 Hold down CTRL, right-click the grid property, and then click Create Map.
When you create a map from a grid property, the following occurs:
• The Map window opens and displays the contour map. For an overview of this
window, see "Map Window Quick Tour" on page 4-15.
• In the Object Tree, the map appears in the Map list. The naming convention is
Map_2D-GridName (if you create more than one map from the same 2D-Grid, the
command adds _ n to the name, where n starts with zero).
Tip You can create more • A new view is created in the project. For more information about views, see "Opening
than one view of the same an Existing Map View" on page 4-17.
map by opening a new Map
window. For information,
see "Opening a New 2D
Window" on page 1-11.

To create a contour 1 In the Object Tree, right-click Map, point to Contour Map, and then click From
map from computed Computed Pay Zone to open the Map Pay Zone wizard. The Defining Pay Zone
pay zones page opens.

2 In the Wells box, select the wells that will be used to compute the map.

4-6 Visualizing Data in Maps GOCAD® 2009.1 User Guide

 Part
III

Visualization
3 In the Log area, do this:
a In the Log box, enter the name of the log that you want to use to define the pay
zone for each well.
b In the Cut-off box, type the cut-off value (a minimum or maximum value on
which the data will be filtered) to be applied to the log you selected in step a; to
the left of the Cut-off box, select >= if you want to include only values greater
than or equal to the specified value or <= if you want to include only values less
than or equal to the specified value.
Note The cut-off value you specify must be within the range indicated by the minimum
and maximum values that display to the right of the Cut-off box. These values update
automatically to correspond to the selection you make in the Log box.

For example, if you want to define the pay zone as the sand facies along the well as
determined by values in the log named Facies, in the Log box, you would enter
Facies. If sand is defined as 1 and shale is defined as 0, you would select >= , and in
the Cut-off box you would type 1. GOCAD would include only sand facies in your
map.
Note The pay zone for each well can be defined in one or more intervals of the well path (see
Figure 4–1 on page 4-9).

4 If you want to use another log as an additional filter for defining the pay zone, select
the Additional Cut-off check box; if you do not want to use another log, clear the
Additional Cut-off check box
5 If you selected the Additional Cut-off check box in step 4, enter the information for
the additional log in the Curve box and under it as you did in the Log box and under
it in step 3.
To continue the example in step 3, if you want to define the pay zone for the
specified wells as sand with a porosity higher than .15, in the Curve box, you would
enter Porosity. You would select >= , and in the Cut-off box you would type .15.
6 Click Next to display the Defining Map page. This page defines the position, areal
extent, resolution, and orientation of the map.

7 In the Name box, type a name for the Map and 2D-Grid objects that will be created.
The name must follow the rules in Part I: Getting Started, "Naming Objects" on
page 3-7.
8 In the U and V boxes of the Number of cells area, type the number of cells that you
want in the 2D-Grid in the u and v directions, respectively.

Rock & Fluid Canvas™ 2009 | Epos™ 4.0 4.1 Creating a Map 4-7
Paradigm™

9 In the Origin area, do one of the following:

• To have GOCAD define the map coordinates based on the selected wells (step 2),
click Estimate .

The values in the X, Y, and Z Origin boxes and the U and V Grid spacing boxes
update automatically so that the map covers the selected wells. Optionally, you
can manually adjust the values that are displayed in any of the Origin or Grid
spacing boxes.

• Click , and then click the location of the map origin in the 3D Viewer.

The values in the X, Y, and Z boxes update automatically. Optionally, you can
manually adjust the values.
• Type the x-, y-, and z-values for the map origin in the appropriate boxes.
10 If you want to change the values for the grid spacing, in the U and V Grid spacing
boxes, type values for the length of the cells in the u- and v-direction.
The value is expressed in the areal unit of measure selected when you created the
project.
Note GOCAD computes the values in the U and V boxes as the u-extension divided by the
number of cells you specified for the u-direction in step 8 and the v-extension divided by the
number of cells you specified for the v-direction in step 8, respectively.

11 In the Orientation box, enter the value in degrees for the angle of the 2D grid
relative to north.
12 Click Next to display the Mapping page. A 2D-Grid object is created and displays in
the 3D Viewer. In the Object Tree, the name that you specified in step 7 appears in
the 2D-Grid list.

13 Use the 2D-Grid object that appears in the 3D Viewer to check the map extension
and position. If necessary, click Back and modify the values in the Defining Map
page to adjust the map extension and position.
14 In the Please check thickness maps to compute area, select any of the following
properties that you want to compute. Figure 4–1 provides a graphic illustration of
each property.
• Net thickness. The sum of the lengths of the intervals of the pay zone.

• Total thickness. The distance between the top and bottom pay zone.

4-8 Visualizing Data in Maps GOCAD® 2009.1 User Guide

 Part
III

Visualization
• Net property average. The average value of the well log properties that you
selected in the Properties to average box for the intervals of the pay zone.
• Total property average. The average value of the properties to average
between the top and bottom pay zones.

Figure 4–1 Thickness map properties

Cut-off (panel1), >= (panel1) Cut-off (panel1), >= (panel1)

Top pay
zone
d1 Top pay
zone
zone1

log1 log1
(panel1) (panel1)

d2
zone2
Property to
average
(panel 3)

d3 zone3

Bottom Bottom
pay zone pay zone

Net thickness = d1+d2+d3, where Net Property Average = Average of values

d1, d2, and d3 are the length of the of property to average in zone1, zone2,
portion of the log above cut-off value and zone3

Total Thickness = distance between top Total Property Average = Average of

and bottom pay zone values of property to average between
top and bottom pay zones

Rock & Fluid Canvas™ 2009 | Epos™ 4.0 4.1 Creating a Map 4-9
Paradigm™

15 If you selected Net property average or Total property average in step 14, do
this:
a In the Properties to average box, select the properties of the wells you selected
in step 2 on page 4-6 for which you want to compute a net average, total
average, or both.
b In the Average method box, select the type of average that you want to
compute (arithmetic, geometric, or harmonic). For information about these
averaging methods, see Part X: Reservoir Production and Simulation, "Methods
for Upscaling (Averaging)" on page 2-44.
16 In the Interpolation method area, select the interpolation method that you want to
use to interpolate average values for the property or properties you specified in
step 15. For information about the available interpolation methods (DSI, Kriging, and
inverse distance), see Part V: Reservoir Modeling, "Introduction to Interpolation
Concepts" on page 2-10.
17 If you selected Kriging in step 16, do this:

a In the Angle of major correlation box, enter the azimuth value of the main
direction of interpolation, expressed in degrees relative to north.
b In the Major correlation distance box, type the maximum length of
interpolation, in the areal unit of the project.
c In the Areal anisotropy ratio box, type the value that corresponds to the ratio
of the maximum length to the minimum length of the interpolation area. For
example, type 1 for round bodies or 2 for bodies that are elongated by a factor of
2 along the azimuth.
18 If you selected Inverse distance in step 16, in the Inverse distance exponent box,
enter the exponent value in the formula used to calculate inverse distance. For the
formula and more information, see Part IX: Reservoir Modeling, "Inverse distance" on
page 2-11.

19 Click Next to display the Create Map page. GOCAD computes the properties you
selected in step 14, and the properties are displayed in the 2D-Grid list in the
Object Tree.

4-10 Visualizing Data in Maps GOCAD® 2009.1 User Guide

 Part
III

Visualization
20 In the Property to display box, select the property that you want to display in the
map.
21 Click Create Map. The map displays, showing the property you selected in step 20 as
contours and colors.
22 Click Finish. The wizard closes.
When you create a map, the following occurs:
• The Map window opens and displays a map with the extensions you specified. For an
overview of the Map window, see "Map Window Quick Tour" on page 4-15.
• In the Object Tree, the name of the map appears in the Map list. The naming
convention is Name_map (if you create more than one map with the same name
using the Map Pay Zone wizard, the command adds _ n to the name, where n starts
with zero).
Tip You can create more • A new view is created in the project. For more information about views, see "Opening
than one view of the same
an Existing Map View" on page 4-17.
map by opening a new Map
window. For information,
see "Opening a New 2D
Window" on page 1-11.

To create a map from ♦ In the GOCAD window, right-click the name of a surface in the Object Tree, and then
a surface click Create Map.
– or –
1 In the 3D Viewer, display the surface that you want to use to create the map.
2 Hold down CTRL, right-click the surface, and then click Create Map.
When you create a map from a surface, the following occurs:
• The Map window opens and displays the map. For an overview of this window, see
"Map Window Quick Tour" on page 4-15.
• In the Object Tree, the map appears in the Map list. The naming convention is
Map_SurfaceName (if you create more than one map from the same surface, the
command adds _ n to the name, where n starts with zero).
Tip You can create more • A new view is created in the project. For more information about views, see "Opening
than one view of the same an Existing Map View" on page 4-17.
map by opening a new Map
window. For information,
see "Opening a New 2D
Window" on page 1-11.

To create a map from ♦ In the GOCAD window, right-click the name of a 2D grid in the Object Tree, and then
a 2D grid click Create Map.
When you create a map from a 2D grid, the following occurs:
• The Map window opens and displays the map. For an overview of this window, see
"Map Window Quick Tour" on page 4-15.
• In the Object Tree, the map appears in the Map list. The naming convention is
Map_2DGridName (if you create more than one map from the same 2D grid, the
command adds _ n to the name, where n starts with zero).

Rock & Fluid Canvas™ 2009 | Epos™ 4.0 4.1 Creating a Map 4-11
Paradigm™

Tip You can create more • A new view is created in the project. For more information about views, see "Opening
than one view of the same
an Existing Map View" on page 4-17.
map by opening a new Map
window. For information,
see "Opening a New 2D
Window" on page 1-11.

To create a contour 1 In the GOCAD window, right-click Map in the Object Tree, point to Contour Map,
map from well and then click From Well Markers to open the dialog box.
markers

2 In the Grid surface name box, type a name for the 2D-Grid object that will be
created. The name must follow the rules in Part I: Getting Started, "Naming Objects"
on page 3-7. The naming convention is Map_ 2DGridName (if you create more than
one map from the same 2D grid, the command adds _n to the name, where n starts
with zero).
3 In the Marker name box, select the name of the well markers that you want to use
to build the 2D grid.
4 Click OK to carry out the command and close the dialog box, or click Apply to carry
out the command and leave the dialog box open.
When you create a map from a 2D grid, the following occurs:
• The Map window opens and displays the map. For an overview of this window, see
"Map Window Quick Tour" on page 4-15.
• In the Object Tree, the map appears in the Map list. The naming convention is
Map_2DGridName (if you create more than one map from the same 2D grid, the
command adds _ n to the name, where n starts with zero).
Tip You can create more • A new view is created in the project. For more information about views, see "Opening
than one view of the same an Existing Map View" on page 4-17.
map by opening a new Map
window. For information,
see "Opening a New 2D
Window" on page 1-11.

To create a contour 1 In the GOCAD window, right-click Map in the Object Tree, point to Contour Map,
map from well and then click From Well Markers and Units to open the dialog box.
markers and
stratigraphic units

2 In the Grid surface name box, type a name for the 2D-Grid object that will be
created. The name must follow the rules in Part I: Getting Started, "Naming Objects"

4-12 Visualizing Data in Maps GOCAD® 2009.1 User Guide

 Part
III

Visualization
on page 3-7. The naming convention is Map_ 2DGridName (if you create more than
one map from the same 2D grid, the command adds _n to the name, where n starts
with zero).
3 In the Unit box, select the stratigraphic unit from which you want to create the 2D
grid.
4 Click OK to carry out the command and close the dialog box, or click Apply to carry
out the command and leave the dialog box open.
Maps that you create using this method have the following properties:
• Z. Depth of the top of the stratigraphic unit.

• True vertical thickness (TVT). The thickness of the unit measured vertically at a
point. The values of true vertical thickness are plotted and contours are displayed in
an isochore map (that is, a map showing the true thickness of the split cells).
Figure 4–2 illustrates TVT, TST, and VT.
• True stratigraphic thickness (TST). The thickness of the unit after correcting for the
dip and the deviation of the well that passes through it. The values of true
stratigraphic thickness are plotted and contours are displayed in an isopach map (that
is, a map showing the thickness perpendicular to the bedding surfaces). Figure 4–2
illustrates TVT, TST, and VT.
• VT. Vertical distance between the two markers delimiting the top and base of the
stratigraphic unit in the well path, independent of the slope of the marker. Figure 4–2
illustrates TVT, TST, and VT.

Figure 4–2 True vertical

thickness and true
stratigraphic thickness
Solid black line: well path

TVT
VT Red lines: markers

Dashed lines: planes

horizontal to markers
TST

When you create a map from a 2D grid, the following occurs:

• The Map window opens and displays the map. For an overview of this window, see
"Map Window Quick Tour" on page 4-15.
• In the Object Tree, the map appears in the Map list. The naming convention is
Map_2DGridName (if you create more than one map from the same 2D grid, the
command adds _ n to the name, where n starts with zero).
Tip You can create more • A new view is created in the project. For more information about views, see "Opening
than one view of the same
an Existing Map View" on page 4-17.
map by opening a new Map
window. For information,
see "Opening a New 2D
Window" on page 1-11.

Rock & Fluid Canvas™ 2009 | Epos™ 4.0 4.1 Creating a Map 4-13
Paradigm™

To create a contour 1 In the GOCAD window, right-click Map in the Object Tree, point to Contour Map,
map from PointsSet and then click From PointsSet to open the dialog box.
objects

2 In the Grid surface name box, type a name for the 2D-Grid object that the
command will create. The name must follow the rules in Part I: Getting Started,
"Naming Objects" on page 3-7. The naming convention is Map_2DGridName (if you
create more than one map from the same 2D grid, the command adds _ n to the
name, where n starts with zero).
3 Do the following to specify the number of cells in the 2D grid in the main and
secondary directions of extension:
a In the Nu box, type the number of cells in the u direction.
b In the Nv box, type the number of cells in the v direction.
4 To have the property information stored at the centers of the 2D-Grid cells, select the
Cell centered check box. If you do not select this check box, the property
information will be stored at the corner points of the cells. For more information
about cell-centered and corner-point 2D-Grids, see Part IV: Foundation Modeling,
"Property" on page 4-3.
5 In the AtomsSet Points box, select the PointsSet, Surface, or Curve object from
which the 2D-Grid will be created.
6 Click OK to carry out the command and close the dialog box, or click Apply to carry
out the command and leave the dialog box open.
When you create a map from a 2D grid, the following occurs:
• The Map window opens and displays the map. For an overview of this window, see
"Map Window Quick Tour" on page 4-15.
• In the Object Tree, the map appears in the Map list. The naming convention is
Map_2DGridName (if you create more than one map from the same 2D grid, the
command adds _ n to the name, where n starts with zero).
Tip You can create more • A new view is created in the project. For more information about views, see "Opening
than one view of the same
an Existing Map View" on page 4-17.
map by opening a new Map
window. For information,
see "Opening a New 2D
Window" on page 1-11.

4-14 Visualizing Data in Maps GOCAD® 2009.1 User Guide

 Part
III

Visualization
4.2 Map Window Quick Tour
When you create a map, the Map window opens. Figure 4–3 shows an example. The
work you do in this window is saved in your project with the view. You can close the Map
window without losing your work; just be sure to save your project before closing the
program.

Figure 4–3 Map window

z 1

z 4

z 5

z 2
z 3

z 6

z 7

z 8
z 9

z 1 Map menu bar. The menu bar contains commands for managing map views,
editing the legend, manipulating the view, undoing and redoing operations, and
getting help. For more information about the commands in these menus, see
"Exporting as a Graphics File, Printing, Saving, and Copying a 2D View" on
page 1-15, "Displaying Legends, Color Bars, and Scale Bars in a 2D View" on
page 1-17, and "Setting the Display in 2D Windows" on page 1-8.

z 2 Task Pane. The Task Pane contains an object browser, which includes all objects
in the project that are eligible to be visualized on the map. The browser works in
a similar manner to the Object Tree in the GOCAD window. You can use it to
show and hide objects on the map. Additionally, you can use it to access shortcut
menu commands, just as you would in the Object Tree. For example, by right-
clicking an object name in the browser you can access the Attributes, Copy,
Delete, Rename, Save, and other commands. For more information about the
Rename, Copy, and Delete commands, see Part I: Getting Started, "Renaming,
Copying, and Deleting Objects" on page 3-18. For information about other
shortcut commands for objects, see the documentation for the command in
Part IV: Foundation Modeling.

Rock & Fluid Canvas™ 2009 | Epos™ 4.0 4.2 Map Window Quick Tour 4-15
Paradigm™

z
3 View. This area is where you display objects and manipulate the map. The
horizontal axes show distances in the x direction, and the vertical axes show
distances in the y direction.

z
4 Selection toolbar. Buttons on this toolbar change the pointer to select objects,
pan the view vertically, and compute areas and distances on the map.

z
5 View toolbar. With this toolbar, you can change the view by zooming. You can
also open a dialog box for changing the scale and dimensions of the view. For
more information, see "Setting the Display in 2D Windows" on page 1-8 and
"Editing Map View Settings" on page 4-44.

z
6 File toolbar. With this toolbar, you can save the map to a CGM, bitmap, or GIF
file; copy the map to the clipboard; and print the map. For more information, see
"Exporting as a Graphics File, Printing, Saving, and Copying a 2D View" on
page 1-15.

z
7 Options toolbar. You can use this toolbar to show the legend, map scale, color
bar for each displayed property, and grid lines. For more information, see
"Setting Display Options in a 2D View" on page 1-9.

z
8 Coordinates toolbar. This toolbar contains tools you can use to track the
location of the pointer and to show a visual guide, which spans the view and
represents the x- and y-axes as dashed lines with the origin at the location of the
pointer. You can synchronize these tools with the pointer in the 3D Viewer. For
more information, see "Synchronizing the Pointer Between the 3D Viewer, 2D
Views, and Epos Applications" on page 1-13.

z
9 Attribute toolbar. Before you select an object in your map the Attribute
toolbar displays "Nothing Selected." The Attribute toolbar works the same way
as the one in the GOCAD window. When you select an object in the browser, the
buttons and commands on the Attribute toolbar change with the type of object
selected.

4-16 Visualizing Data in Maps GOCAD® 2009.1 User Guide

 Part
III

Visualization
4.3 Opening an Existing Map View
When you create a map, a window opens and a new view is created automatically. If you
want to create another view of the same map, you open a new Map window—for
information, see "Opening a New 2D Window" on page 1-11. When you create a view, it
is saved in your project automatically, and you can open it at a later time.
Note The view and the work you do in it are stored in your computer's memory. You can close the
Map window without losing the work you did in the view. However, if you want the view to be
available the next time you open the project, you must save the project.

To open a Map view ♦ In the Object Tree, right-click the name of the map, point to Open View, and then
click the view you want to open.

The Map window opens and displays the selected view.

Rock & Fluid Canvas™ 2009 | Epos™ 4.0 4.3 Opening an Existing Map View 4-17
Paradigm™

4.4 Visualizing Objects and Properties on a

Map
In the Map window, all objects that are eligible to be visualized on the map appear in the
browser by default. For an object to appear in the browser, the object's bounding box
must be perpendicular to the map plane and be within the maximum projection distance
if one was specified during map creation. For a simple illustration of how an object is
projected onto a map, see Figure 4–4.

Figure 4–4 Eligible object The portion of the object below the
before (left) and after Bounding box map plane is projected onto the map.
(right) it is visualized on a t
ec
map
bj
O

Map Map
y y

x x

You can visualize the following GOCAD object types on a map. For each of these object
types except Well, Cross Section, Log Display, and ShotLine, you can also visualize an
object property on the map.
• PointsSet • SGrid • Log Display
• Curve • Well • ShotLine
• Surface • 2D-Grid
• Voxet • Cross Section

By visualizing objects on a map, you can perform a quality check of the structure. For
example, you can check the structural interpretation of a horizon, by showing contours
and checking the consistency of the throw.
For information about how to visualize objects on a map, see the following topics:
• "Showing or Hiding Objects on a Map," page 4-19
• "Accessing Display Settings for an Object on a Map," page 4-20
• "Accessing Display Settings for an Object Property on a Map," page 4-21
• "Visualizing a Point Set on a Map," page 4-21
• "Visualizing a Curve on a Map," page 4-22
• "Visualizing a Surface on a Map," page 4-23
• "Visualizing a ShotLine Trace on a Map," page 4-27
• "Visualizing a Voxet on a Map," page 4-27
• "Visualizing a Stratigraphic Grid on a Map," page 4-30
• "Visualizing a Well on a Map," page 4-31
• "Visualizing a Gridded Surface (2D-Grid) on a Map," page 4-34
• "Visualizing a Cross Section Trace on a Map," page 4-37

4-18 Visualizing Data in Maps GOCAD® 2009.1 User Guide

 Part
III

Visualization
4.4.1 Showing or Hiding Objects on a Map
You can show or hide objects on a map by using the browser and shortcuts in the view.
You can also filter the browser so that it will list only those objects you have ever
displayed on the map. For more information, see the following topics:
• "To show objects on a map," page 4-19
• "To hide objects on a map," page 4-19
• "To filter the map browser," page 4-19
• "To list all eligible objects in the map browser," page 4-19
• "Why there might be objects in the browser that cannot be displayed on the map,"
page 4-20

To show objects on a ♦ Do any of the following:

map
• To show all objects, right-click Objects in the browser or right-click a blank area
in the view, and then click Show All.
• To show all objects of a particular type, right-click the object type—for example,
PointsSet or Curve—in the browser, and then click Show All.
• To show an individual object, in the browser, select the check box next to its
name.
• To show an object property, in the browser, select the check box next to the name
of the object, and then select the check box next to the name of the property.

To hide objects on a ♦ Do any of the following:

map
• To hide all objects, right-click Objects in the browser or right-click a blank area in
the view, and then click Hide All.
• To hide all objects of a particular type, right-click the object type—for example,
PointsSet or Curve—in the browser, and then click Hide All.
• To hide an individual object, in the browser, clear the check box next to its name.

• To hide an object property, in the browser, clear the check box next to the name
of the property.

To filter the map ♦ Right-click a blank area of the browser (such as the area under the browser), and then
browser click View eligible objects.
Only objects that are currently displayed or were previously displayed on the map appear
in the browser.

To list all eligible If you filtered the browser as described in the previous procedure, you can revert to listing
objects in the map all eligible objects.
browser
♦ Right-click a blank area of the browser (such as the area under the browser), and then
click View eligible objects again.
All objects eligible to be displayed on the map appear in the browser.

Rock & Fluid Canvas™ 2009 | Epos™ 4.0 4.4 Visualizing Objects and Properties on a Map 4-19
Paradigm™

Why there might be If an object's bounding box is above or below the map, the object appears in the browser
objects in the even though the object itself might not be directly above or below the map plane. For an
browser that cannot example, see Figure 4–5. In this case, the object cannot be projected onto the map. If you
be displayed on the attempt to show the object, nothing will happen.
map

Figure 4–5 Case in which

an object in the browser Bounding box
cannot be displayed on

t
the map

ec
bj
O

Map
y

4.4.2 Accessing Display Settings for an Object on a

Map
You can use settings available in the Attribute toolbar and the Attributes dialog box to
change the appearance of any object you display on a map. The settings are similar to the
ones available in 3D Viewer, but the attributes are applicable in a 2D view. The
Attributes dialog box for some object types contains more advanced settings than the
ones available on the toolbar.
Changing an attribute viewable in 2D and 3D, such as the solid color of an object,
changes the attribute in the 3D Viewer and in other 2D windows. For more information,
see "What Is Synchronized Between 2D and 3D Views?" on page 1-12.
For information about how to open the Attribute toolbar and the Attributes dialog box
for a specific object on your map, see the following topics:
• "To open the Attribute toolbar for an object on a map," page 4-20
• "To open the Attributes dialog box for an object on a map," page 4-20

To open the Attribute ♦ In the Map window, select the name of an object in the browser.
toolbar for an object
on a map The Attribute toolbar for the object appears at the bottom of the Map window.

To open the ♦ In the Map window, right-click the object in the browser, and then click Attributes
Attributes dialog box to open the dialog box.
for an object on a
map

4-20 Visualizing Data in Maps GOCAD® 2009.1 User Guide

 Part
III

Visualization
4.4.3 Accessing Display Settings for an Object
Property on a Map
You can use settings available in the Attribute toolbar to change the appearance of
object properties you display on a map. The settings available on Attribute toolbars in
the Map window are the same as the ones in the GOCAD window. Changing the color
map of the property in the Map window affects the property's appearance in the
3D Viewer and in other 2D views.

To open the Attribute ♦ In the Map window, expand the object in the browser, expand properties, and then
toolbar for an object select the name of the property.
on a map
The Attribute toolbar for the property appears at the bottom of the Map window.

4.4.4 Visualizing a Point Set on a Map

You can use the Attribute toolbar to change the color and size of nodes in a point set.
You can also specify the symbol to represent nodes that are in the map (that is, nodes that
intersect the map). By selecting additional options in the Attributes dialog box, you can
specify different symbols to represent nodes that are over the map and nodes that are
under the map.
Figure 4–6 shows an example of a point set in map view with cross symbols representing
nodes that are over the map and point symbols representing nodes that are under the
map. Compare with the 3D Viewer view on the right. In this example, none of the nodes
intersects the map.

Figure 4–6 Using different node symbols for points on a map

For more information, see the following topics:

• "Attribute toolbar for a point set on a map," page 4-22
• "Attributes dialog box for a point set on a map," page 4-22

Rock & Fluid Canvas™ 2009 | Epos™ 4.0 4.4 Visualizing Objects and Properties on a Map 4-21
Paradigm™

Attribute toolbar for In a Map window, when you select the name of a point set in the browser, the Attribute
a point set on a map toolbar for that point set is displayed at the bottom of the window.

Color. Specifies the color of the selected point set. Click the button, and
then click the color.

Nodes Symbols. Specifies the symbol (for example, point, cross, square) to
represent nodes in the point set that lie in the map.
Note You can use the Attribute dialog box to specify a different symbol for nodes
that are over the map and for nodes that are under the map.

Nodes Symbols Size. Specifies the size in points of node symbols in the
selected point set.

Attributes dialog box You can specify how you want a point set to appear on a map by selecting options for the
for a point set on a color, size, and symbol in the Attributes dialog box. For information about how to open
map the dialog box, see "Accessing Display Settings for an Object on a Map" on page 4-20.

Color. Specifies the color of the selected point set. Click the color button, and then click
the color.
Nodes symbols size. Specifies the size in points of node symbols in the selected point
set.
Nodes symbols (in the map). Specifies the symbol (for example, point, cross, square) to
represent nodes in the point set that lie in the map.
Nodes symbols (over the map). Specifies the symbol (for example, point, cross, square)
to represent nodes in the point set that are above the map.
Nodes symbols (under the map). Specifies the symbol (for example, point, cross,
square) to represent nodes in the point set that are below the map.

4.4.5 Visualizing a Curve on a Map

You can use the Attribute toolbar and the Attributes dialog box to change the color
and size of the curve. You can also fill a closed curve and select the fill color.

4-22 Visualizing Data in Maps GOCAD® 2009.1 User Guide

 Part
III

Visualization
For more information, see the following topics:
• "Attribute toolbar for a curve on a map," page 4-23
• "Attributes dialog box for a curve on a map," page 4-23

Attribute toolbar for In a Map window, when you select the name of a curve in the browser, the Attribute
a curve on a map toolbar for that curve is displayed at the bottom of the window.

Curve Color. Specifies the color of the selected curve. Click the button,
and then click the color.

Curve Width. Specifies the width in points of the selected curve.

Curve Fill. Applies a solid color fill to the selected curve. You can use this
option for a closed curve only. To specify the fill color, click the arrow next
to the button, and then click the color.

Attributes dialog box You can specify how you want a curve to appear on a map by selecting options for the
for a curve on a map color, size, and fill (for closed curves) in the Attributes dialog box. For information about
how to open the dialog box, see "Accessing Display Settings for an Object on a Map" on
page 4-20.

Color. Specifies the color of the selected curve. Click the color button, and then click the
color.
Width. Specifies the width in points of the selected curve.
Fill. Applies a solid color fill to the selected curve. You can use this option for a closed
curve only. To specify the fill color, click the color button, and then click the color.

4.4.6 Visualizing a Surface on a Map

You can use the Attribute toolbar to change the appearance of the surface on the map
and show any well markers associated with the surface. By using the Attributes dialog
box, you can additionally show interpretation lines associated with a surface if it was
edited in cross section view. Figure 4–7 shows a zoomed in view of a map with a surface
and its associated well markers displayed.

Rock & Fluid Canvas™ 2009 | Epos™ 4.0 4.4 Visualizing Objects and Properties on a Map 4-23
Paradigm™

Figure 4–7 Map with well

markers displayed on a
surface

Well name

Marker

Dip marker (value)

For more information, see the following topics:

• "Attribute toolbar for a surface on a map," page 4-24
• "Attributes dialog box for a surface on a map," page 4-25

Attribute toolbar for In a Map window, when you select the name of a surface in the browser, the Attribute
a surface on a map toolbar for that surface is displayed at the bottom of the window.

Surface Color. Specifies the color of the selected surface. Click the
button, and then click the color.

Mesh. Displays the surface mesh (triangle boundaries).

Mesh Color. Specifies the color of the surface mesh. Click the button, and
then click the color.

Mesh Width. Specifies the thickness in points of the surface mesh.

Borders. Displays the surface borders.

Borders Color. Specifies the color of the surface borders. Click the
button, and then click the color.

Borders Width. Specifies the thickness in points of the surface border.

Markers. Displays well markers associated with the surface. The well
markers must have the same feature name as the surface.

Well Name. Labels the markers with the name of the well, using the same
color specified for the dip marker.

4-24 Visualizing Data in Maps GOCAD® 2009.1 User Guide

 Part
III

Visualization
Dip Marker. Displays the dip value—that is, the angle of the marker from
horizontal in degrees (0 to 90). To specify the color of the dip marker, the
dip value, and the well name, click the arrow next to the button, and then
click the color.

Marker Size [1-10]. Specifies the size in points of the well marker, well
name, and dip value.

Attributes dialog box You can specify how you want a surface to appear on a map by selecting options in the
for a surface on a Attributes dialog box. You can change graphical attributes of the surface itself, and you
map can visualize well markers associated with the surface. For information about how to
open the dialog box, see "Accessing Display Settings for an Object on a Map" on
page 4-20.
Graphic tab

Surface
Visible. Displays the selected surface on the map. To specify the surface color,
click the color button, and then click the color.
Mesh
Visible. Displays the surface mesh (triangle boundaries). To specify the mesh
color, click the color button, and then click the color. To specify the mesh
thickness, select a point size in the box to the right.
Borders
Visible. Displays the surface borders. To specify the color of the borders, click the
color button, and then click the color. To specify the thickness of the borders,
select a point size in the box to the right.
Interpretation

Rock & Fluid Canvas™ 2009 | Epos™ 4.0 4.4 Visualizing Objects and Properties on a Map 4-25
Paradigm™

Visible. Draws the interpretation lines associated with this surface. The
interpretation lines are created when you edit the surface in cross section view. To
specify the color of the interpretation line, click the color button, and then click
the color. To change the width of the interpretation line, select a point size in the
box to the right.
Contours
Label spacing. Controls the spacing between labels on contour lines. To specify
the interval between contour line labels, type a value in pixels.
Number of labels. Controls the number of labels displayed on a single
continuous contour line. If you specify 0, as many labels will be displayed as
would fit on a single continuous contour line.
Markers tab

Visible. Displays well markers associated with the surface. The well markers must
have the same name as the surface.
Dip
Visible. Displays the dip value—that is, the angle of the marker from horizontal
in degrees (0 to 90). To specify the color of the dip marker, the dip value, and the
well name, click the color button, and then click the color. To specify the size of
the well marker, well name, and dip value, select a point size in the box to the
right.

4-26 Visualizing Data in Maps GOCAD® 2009.1 User Guide

 Part
III

Visualization
4.4.7 Visualizing a ShotLine Trace on a Map
You can use the Attribute toolbar and the Attributes dialog box to change the color
and size of a ShotLine trace on a map.
For more information, see the following topics:
• "Attribute toolbar for a ShotLine trace on a map," page 4-27
• "Attributes dialog box for a ShotLine trace on a map," page 4-27

Attribute toolbar for In a Map window, when you select the name of a shot line in the browser, the Attribute
a ShotLine trace on a toolbar for that shot line is displayed at the bottom of the window.
map

Line Color. Specifies the color of the line representing the shot line trace.
Click the button, and then click the color.

Line Width. Specifies the thickness in points of the cross section trace.

Attributes dialog box You can specify how you want a ShotLine trace to appear on a map by selecting options
for a ShotLine trace for the line color and size in the Attributes dialog box. For information about how to
on a map open the dialog box, see "Accessing Display Settings for an Object on a Map" on
page 4-20.

Line
Visible. Displays the line representing the cross section trace. To specify the line color,
click the color button, and then click the color. To specify the line thickness, select a
point size in the box to the right.

4.4.8 Visualizing a Voxet on a Map

You can use the Attribute toolbar and the Attributes dialog box to change the
appearance of a voxet on a map. For example, you can display and control the
appearance of the voxet cage, a primary grid, and a secondary grid. Using the Attribute
toolbar, you can also navigate the voxet by changing the section number.
For more information, see the following topics:
• "Attribute toolbar for a voxet on a map," page 4-28
• "Attributes dialog box for a voxet on a map," page 4-29

Rock & Fluid Canvas™ 2009 | Epos™ 4.0 4.4 Visualizing Objects and Properties on a Map 4-27
Paradigm™

Attribute toolbar for In a Map window, when you select the name of a voxet in the browser, the Attribute
a voxet on a map toolbar for that voxet is displayed at the bottom of the window.

Voxet Cage. Displays the cage (boundary) of the selected voxet. To

specify the color of the cage, click the arrow next to the button,
and then click the color.

Voxet Cage Width. Specifies the thickness in points of the voxet

cage.

Primary Grid. Displays primary grid lines. These grid lines are for
display purposes only and do not correspond to the voxet gridding.
To specify the grid color, click the arrow next to the button, and
then click the color.

Voxet Grid Main Ticks. Specifies the primary grid resolution for
display purposes.

Voxet Primary Grid Width. Specifies the thickness of primary grid

lines in points.

Secondary Grid. Displays secondary grid lines. These grid lines are
for display purposes only and do not correspond to the voxet
gridding. To specify the grid color, click the arrow next to the
button, and then click the color.

Voxet Grid Small Ticks. Specifies the number of secondary grid

divisions you want per main tick.

Voxet Secondary Grid Width. Specifies the thickness of

secondary grid lines in points.

Section Selection. Specifies the voxet section to display, usually

along axis-3 (whichever voxet axis that the map is most closely
aligned with). With a property displayed on the voxet, move the
slider or enter a number in the box to browse the property through
sections of the voxet.

4-28 Visualizing Data in Maps GOCAD® 2009.1 User Guide

 Part
III

Visualization
Attributes dialog box You can specify how you want a voxet to appear on a map by selecting options in the
for a voxet on a map Attributes dialog box. You can display and change the appearance of the voxet cage and
grid lines. For information about how to open the dialog box, see "Accessing Display
Settings for an Object on a Map" on page 4-20.

Cage
Visible. Displays the cage (boundary) of the selected voxet. To specify the cage
color, click the color button, and then click the color. To specify the cage
thickness, select a point size in the box to the right.
Primary grid
Visible. Displays primary grid lines. These grid lines are for display purposes only
and do not correspond to the voxet gridding. To specify the grid color, click the
color button, and then click the color.
Ticks. Move the slider to specify the primary grid resolution for display purposes.
To specify the thickness of the grid lines, select a point size in the box to the
right.
Secondary grid
Visible. Displays secondary grid lines. These grid lines are for display purposes
only and do not correspond to the voxet gridding. To specify the grid color, click
the color button, and then click the color.
Ticks. Move the slider to specify the number of secondary grid divisions you want
per main tick. To specify the thickness of the grid lines, select a point size in the
box to the right.

Rock & Fluid Canvas™ 2009 | Epos™ 4.0 4.4 Visualizing Objects and Properties on a Map 4-29
Paradigm™

4.4.9 Visualizing a Stratigraphic Grid on a Map

You can use the Attribute toolbar and the Attributes dialog box to change the
appearance of a stratigraphic grid (SGrid) on a map. For example, you can display and
control the appearance of the solid fill and the grid. Using the Attribute toolbar, you can
also navigate the SGrid by changing the section number.
For more information, see the following topics:
• "Attribute toolbar for an SGrid on a map," page 4-30
• "Attributes dialog box for an SGrid on a map," page 4-31

Attribute toolbar for In a Map window, when you select the name of an SGrid in the browser, the Attribute
an SGrid on a map toolbar for that SGrid is displayed at the bottom of the window.

SGrid Solid. Displays the SGrid solid fill.

SGrid Solid Color. Specifies the color of the SGrid solid fill. Click the button, and
then click the color.

Grid. Displays the grid.

Grid Color. Specifies the color of the grid. Click the button, and then click the
color.

Section Selection. Specifies the SGrid section to display, usually along the K-axis
(whichever SGrid axis that the map is most closely aligned with). With a property
displayed on the SGrid, move the slider or enter a number in the box to browse the
property through sections of the SGrid.

4-30 Visualizing Data in Maps GOCAD® 2009.1 User Guide

 Part
III

Visualization
Attributes dialog box You can specify how you want an SGrid to appear on a map by selecting options in the
for an SGrid on a map Attributes dialog box. You can display the solid fill and the grid, and you can change
their colors. For information about how to open the dialog box, see "Accessing Display
Settings for an Object on a Map" on page 4-20.

Solid
Visible. Displays the SGrid solid fill. To specify the fill color, click the color button,
and then click the color.
Grid
Visible. Displays the grid. To specify the grid color, click the color button, and then
click the color.

4.4.10 Visualizing a Well on a Map

Wells are different from the other objects that you can display on a map in that their
appearance is controlled by a template. When you first create a map, all the wells on a
map have the same appearance when you display them because a default template is
applied to all the wells. Changing the appearance of one well on your map affects all the
other wells that have the default template applied to them. In other words, you are
changing the template rather than the well itself. If you want to apply different settings to
one or more wells on your map, you can create another template and apply it to those
wells.
You can use the Attribute toolbar to change the color and width of the well path in the
well's template. You can also specify the font, size, and color of the well name and the
size of the symbol representing the status of the well. When you display a well on a map,
a solid line represents the path if it is above the map, and a dashed line represents the
path if it is below the map.
The Attributes dialog box offers advanced settings to hide the well path, well name, and
symbol; specify the position of the well symbol; and display the intersection point
between the well path and the map.
For more information, see the following topics:
• "Attribute toolbar for a well on a map," page 4-32
• "Attributes dialog box for an SGrid on a map," page 4-31
• "To create a new template and apply it to wells on a map," page 4-33

Rock & Fluid Canvas™ 2009 | Epos™ 4.0 4.4 Visualizing Objects and Properties on a Map 4-31
Paradigm™

Attribute toolbar for In a Map window, when you select the name of a well in the browser, the Attribute
a well on a map toolbar for that well's template is displayed at the bottom of the window.

Well Path Color. Specifies the color of the well path. Click the
button, and then click the color.

Well Path Width. Specifies the thickness of the well path in

points.

Well Name Font. Specifies the font for the well name.

Well Name Size. Specifies the size of the well name.

Well Name Color. Specifies the color of the well name. Click the
button, and then click the color.

Well Symbol Size. Specifies the size of the symbol representing

the well status.

Attributes dialog box You can select options in the Attributes dialog box to control the display and appearance
for a well on a map of the well path, well name, and well symbol on the map. You can also visualize the
intersection point between the well path and the map. For information about how to
open the dialog box, see "Accessing Display Settings for an Object on a Map" on
page 4-20. In this case, you are setting the attributes for the template applied to the well,
not the well itself.

4-32 Visualizing Data in Maps GOCAD® 2009.1 User Guide

 Part
III

Visualization
Path
Visible. Displays the well path. To specify the color of the well path, click the color
button, and then click the color.
Width. Specifies the thickness of the well path in points.
Symbol
Visible. Displays the symbol representing the well status.
Size. Move the slider to specify the size of the symbol representing the well status.
Position. Places the well symbol at the head or bottom of the well path.
Name
Visible. Displays the well name. To change the appearance of the well name text,
select the font and size in the boxes on the right. To specify the color of the well
name, click , and then click the color.
Intersection
Visible. Displays a point at the location where the well path intersects the map. To
specify the color of the intersection point, click the color button, and then click the
color.
Size. Move the slider to change the size in points of the intersection point.

To create a new 1 In the Map window, right-click the name of a well in the browser and then click
template and apply it Create New Template to open the dialog box.
to wells on a map
Tip If you have several
templates already, right-click
a well whose template most
closely matches the settings
you want to use in the new
template.

2 In the Old template name box, type the name of the template whose settings you
want to copy as a starting point for creating your new template. The name of the
template currently applied to the well is entered by default.
3 In the New template name box, type the name for the new template, and then click
OK.
4 In the browser, select the names of all wells that you want to apply the template to,
right-click one of the selected wells, and then click Use Template to open the dialog
box.

Rock & Fluid Canvas™ 2009 | Epos™ 4.0 4.4 Visualizing Objects and Properties on a Map 4-33
Paradigm™

5 In the Map box, leave the name of the current map selected.
6 In the Well names box, enter the names of all the wells in your map that you want to
apply the template to. The names of the wells that were selected when you accessed
the command are entered by default.
7 In the Template name box, enter the name of the template you want to apply to the
selected wells, and then click OK.
Note The information in the Advanced area of the dialog box is used internally to carry
contextual information. We recommend that you do not change it.

8 Use the Attribute dialog box or Attributes toolbar (as described in the previous
sections) to change the appearance of any of the wells to which the new template is
applied.
All of the wells to which you applied the new template will have the same appearance
when displayed on the map.

4.4.11 Visualizing a Gridded Surface (2D-Grid) on a

Map
You can use the Attribute toolbar and Attributes dialog box to change the appearance
of the gridded surface on the map and to visualize faults associated with the surface.
Note You will be able to display faults if the 2D-Grid object was created from a surface and the
option to create fault polygons was used. For information about the command to create a 2D-Grid
from a surface, see Part IV: Foundation Modeling, "Creating a 2D-Grid from a Surface" on page 4-7.

For more information, see:

• "Attribute toolbar for a 2D grid on a map," page 4-34
• "Attributes dialog box for a gridded surface on a map," page 4-35

Attribute toolbar for In a Map window, when you select the name of a gridded surface in the browser, the
a 2D grid on a map Attribute toolbar for that surface appears at the bottom of the window.

2D-Grid Color. Specifies the color of the selected grid. Click the button,
and then click the color.

Mesh. Displays grid lines on the selected gridded surface.

Mesh Color. Specifies the color of the grid mesh. Click the button, and
then click the color.

Mesh Width. Specifies the thickness in points of the grid mesh.

Borders. Displays the grid borders.

Borders Color. Specifies the color of the grid borders. Click the button,
and then click the color.

4-34 Visualizing Data in Maps GOCAD® 2009.1 User Guide

 Part
III

Visualization
Borders Width. Specifies the thickness in points of the grid border.

Faults. Displays fault polygons associated with the gridded surface.

Note You will be able to display faults if the 2D-Grid was created from a surface
and the option to create fault polygons was used. For information about the
command to create a 2D-Grid from a surface, see Part IV: Foundation Modeling ,
"Creating a 2D-Grid from a Surface" on page 4-7.

Fault Polygon Color. Specifies the color of fault polygons. Click the
button, and then click the color.

Fault Polygon Width. Specifies the thickness in points of the fault

polygons.

Fault Polygon Fill. Fills each fault polygon with the specified color. Click
the arrow next to the button, and then click the color.

Attributes dialog box You can specify how you want a gridded surface (2D-Grid object) to appear on a map by
for a gridded surface selecting options in the Attributes dialog box. You can change graphic attributes for the
on a map gridded surface, and you can visualize fault polygons associated with the surface. For
information about how to open the dialog box, see "Accessing Display Settings for an
Object on a Map" on page 4-20.
Graphic tab

Color. Specifies the color of the selected gridded surface. Click the color button, and
then click the color.
Mesh
Visible. Displays the grid mesh. To specify the mesh color, click the color button,
and then click the color. To specify the mesh thickness, select a point size in the
box to the right.
Borders
Visible. Displays the grid borders. To specify the color of the borders, click the
color button, and then click the color. To specify the thickness of the borders,
select a point size in the box to the right.

Rock & Fluid Canvas™ 2009 | Epos™ 4.0 4.4 Visualizing Objects and Properties on a Map 4-35
Paradigm™

Fault Polygons tab

Visible. Displays fault polygons associated with the gridded surface.

Note You will be able to display faults if the gridded surface was created from a surface and
the option to create fault polygons was used. For information about the command to create a
2D-Grid from a surface, see Part IV: Foundation Modeling, "Creating a 2D-Grid from a Surface"
on page 4-7.

Line
Color. Specifies the color of fault polygons. Click the color button, and then click
the color.
Width. Specifies the thickness in points of fault polygons.
Fill
Visible. Fills the fault polygons.
Color. Specifies the fill color for fault polygons. Click the color button, and then
click the color.

4-36 Visualizing Data in Maps GOCAD® 2009.1 User Guide

 Part
III

Visualization
4.4.12 Visualizing a Cross Section Trace on a Map
You can use the Attribute toolbar and the Attributes dialog box to change the color
and size of a cross section trace on a map. With additional settings in the Attributes
dialog box, you can hide the default cross section labels and change their text.
For more information, see the following topics:
• "Attribute toolbar for a cross section on a map," page 4-37
• "Attributes dialog box for a cross section on a map," page 4-37

Attribute toolbar for In a Map window, when you select the name of a cross section in the browser, the
a cross section on a Attribute toolbar for that cross section is displayed at the bottom of the window.
map

Line Color. Specifies the color of the line representing the cross section
trace. Click the button, and then click the color.

Line Width. Specifies the thickness in points of the cross section trace.

Attributes dialog box You can specify how you want a cross section trace to appear on a map by selecting
for a cross section on options for the line color and size in the Attributes dialog box. You can also show or hide
a map the cross section labels and change their text. For information about how to open the
dialog box, see "Accessing Display Settings for an Object on a Map" on page 4-20.

Line
Visible. Displays the line representing the cross section trace. To specify the line color,
click the color button, and then click the color. To specify the line thickness, select a
point size in the box to the right.
Label
Visible. Labels the start and end of the cross section.
Left label. Specifies the label for the start of the cross section. The default is A. You
can type a new label or delete it if you want to label one end of the cross section only.
Right label. Specifies the label for the end of the cross section. The default is A'. You
can type a new label or delete it if you want to label one end of the cross section only.

Rock & Fluid Canvas™ 2009 | Epos™ 4.0 4.4 Visualizing Objects and Properties on a Map 4-37
Paradigm™

4.5 Visualizing Maps in the 3D Viewer

In addition to creating a 2D view of a map the Map window, you can also create a 3D
view of one in the 3D Viewer. The transition from working in a 2D view to a 3D view can
be difficult. Displaying a map in the 3D Viewer can help you reconcile the 2D and 3D
views. When you display a map in the 3D Viewer, you can display the projection of other
objects on it. Figure 4–8 shows an example of a map displayed in the Map window and
the 3D Viewer.
You can use settings available in the Attribute toolbar and the Attributes dialog box to
change the appearance of maps you display in the 3D Viewer and, in some cases, of
objects you display on a map in the 3D Viewer. You can also use the Attributes dialog
box to view information about a map you display in the 3D Viewer, including the map’s
elevation, width, and height.

Figure 4–8 Comparison of a map displayed in the Map window and the 3D Viewer

The map on the left is displayed in the Map window.

The map on the right is the same map displayed in the
3D Viewer. The same wells are displayed in both views.

For more information, see the following topics:

• "Showing or Hiding Maps in the 3D Viewer," page 4-39
• "Accessing Display Settings for Maps in the 3D Viewer," page 4-39
• "Visualizing a Map in the 3D Viewer," page 4-39
• "Viewing Information about a Map in the 3D Viewer," page 4-41
• "Showing or Hiding Objects on a Map in the 3D Viewer," page 4-41
• "Changing the Display Settings for Objects Displayed on a Map in the 3D Viewer,"
page 4-42

4-38 Visualizing Data in Maps GOCAD® 2009.1 User Guide

 Part
III

Visualization
4.5.1 Showing or Hiding Maps in the 3D Viewer
♦ Do either of the following:

• To show or hide all maps, in the Object Tree, right-click Map, and then click
Show All or Hide All.
• To show or hide an individual map, in the Object Tree, expand Map, and then
select or clear the check box next to the name of the map.

4.5.2 Accessing Display Settings for Maps in the

3D Viewer
You can use settings available in the Attribute toolbar and the Attributes dialog box to
change the appearance of maps you display in the 3D Viewer. The settings are similar to
the ones for other objects you display in the 3D Viewer.
For more information, see the following topics:
• "To open the Attribute toolbar for maps in the 3D Viewer," page 4-39
• "To open the Attributes dialog box for maps in the 3D Viewer," page 4-39

To open the Attribute ♦ To access display settings for an individual map, in the Object Tree, expand Map, and
toolbar for maps in then select the name of the map. The Attribute toolbar for the selected map appears
the 3D Viewer at the bottom of the GOCAD window.
Note To access display settings that apply to all maps, use the Attributes dialog box (see "To
open the Attributes dialog box for maps in the 3D Viewer" on page 4-39).

To open the ♦ Do either of the following:

Attributes dialog box
for maps in the • To access display settings that apply to all maps, in the Object Tree, right-click
3D Viewer Map, and then click Attributes to open the dialog box.
• To access display settings for an individual map, in the Object Tree, expand Map,
right-click the name of the map, and then click Attributes to open the dialog
box.

4.5.3 Visualizing a Map in the 3D Viewer

When you display a map in the 3D Viewer, you can use the Attributes dialog box to
show its bounding box, clipping domain (the area within which objects will be displayed
on the map), or both. You can also change the line colors of the bounding box and
clipping domain. To specify the color, click the color button, and then click the color. By
selecting additional options in the Attributes toolbar, you can display the map’s name
and specify the color of the name. You can also display the map’s boundary and specify
the boundary’s color and width. Additionally, you can specify the transparency or
opaqueness, as well as the color, of the solid fill.
For more information, see the following topics:
• "Attribute toolbar for a map in the 3D Viewer," page 4-40
• "Attributes dialog box for a map in the 3D Viewer," page 4-40

Rock & Fluid Canvas™ 2009 | Epos™ 4.0 4.5 Visualizing Maps in the 3D Viewer 4-39
Paradigm™

Attribute toolbar for When you select the name of a map in the Object Tree, the Attribute toolbar for that
a map in the map is displayed at the bottom of the GOCAD window. A description the buttons in the
3D Viewer toolbar follows.

Bounding Box. Displays an outline showing the extents of the map. The
color strip across the bottom of the button shows the color of the box. Click
the arrow next to the button, and then click the color.

Name. Displays the name of the selected map in the 3D Viewer. The color
strip across the bottom of the button shows the color of the text. Click the
arrow next to the button, and then click the color.

Boundary. Displays an outline of the map. Click the arrow next to the
button, and then click the color.

Boundary Width. Specifies the thickness in points of the boundary.

Material. Specifies the color of the solid fill of the map. Click the arrow
next to the button, and then click the color.

Material Transparency. Specifies the transparency or opaqueness of the

solid fill of the map, where 0 is completely opaque, and 1 is completely
transparent.

Attributes dialog box When you display a map in the 3D Viewer, you can use the Attributes dialog box to
for a map in the show the map’s bounding box, clipping domain, or both. You can also use it to change
3D Viewer the color of the bounding box and clipping domain lines. For information about how to
open the dialog box, see "To open the Attributes dialog box for maps in the 3D Viewer"
on page 4-39.
Graphic tab

Bounding box
Visible. Displays an outline of a box surrounding the selected object. The box
indicates the extents of the object. To specify the color, click the color button,
and then click the color.

4-40 Visualizing Data in Maps GOCAD® 2009.1 User Guide

 Part
III

Visualization
Clipping domain
Visible. Displays the map’s clipping domain, that is, the maximum datum
projection distance, or the area within which objects will be displayed on the
map. (Objects outside the clipping domain will not be displayed on the map.) To
specify the color, click the color button, and then click the color.
Note For information about the Info tab of the Attributes map name dialog box, see "Viewing
Information about a Map in the 3D Viewer" on page 4-41.

4.5.4 Viewing Information about a Map in the

3D Viewer
To view the elevation, width, and height of a map, expressed in the unit of measure you
selected for the project, do this:
1 In the Object Tree, right-click the name of the map, and then click Attributes to
open the dialog box.
2 Click the Info tab. The elevation, width, and height of the map are displayed in the
units of measure for the project.

Note For information about the Graphic tab of the Attributes map name dialog box, see
"Attributes dialog box for a map in the 3D Viewer" on page 4-40.

4.5.5 Showing or Hiding Objects on a Map in the

3D Viewer

To show or hide ♦ In the Object Tree, expand Map, expand the name of the map on which you want to
objects on a map in show or hide objects, and then do one of the following:
the 3D Viewer
• To show or hide all objects of a particular type, right-click the object type—for
example, Well or Curve—and then click Show All or Hide All.
• To show or hide an individual object, expand the object type—for example, Well
or Curve—and then select or clear the check box next to the name of the object
or objects.

Rock & Fluid Canvas™ 2009 | Epos™ 4.0 4.5 Visualizing Maps in the 3D Viewer 4-41
Paradigm™

4.5.6 Changing the Display Settings for Objects

Displayed on a Map in the 3D Viewer
You can use settings available from Attribute toolbars to change the appearance of some
of the objects that you can display on a map in the 3D Viewer. Objects for which these
toolbars are available include Curves, SGrids, Surfaces, and Wells. The Attributes
toolbars for these objects are similar to the ones for the corresponding objects in the Map
window (see "Visualizing Objects and Properties on a Map" on page 4-18).
In some cases, changing the attributes of an object you display on a map in the
3D Viewer, such as the object’s solid color, also changes the attribute in the Map window.
Similarly, in some cases, changing the attribute in the Map window also changes the
attribute in the 3D Viewer. For more information about how changes to an object’s
attributes are synchronized between the 3D Viewer and the 2D windows, see "What Is
Synchronized Between 2D and 3D Views?" on page 1-12.

To open the Attribute ♦ In the Object Tree, expand Map, expand the name of the map on which you want to
toolbar for an object display objects, expand the object type—for example, Well or Curve—and then
on a map displayed in select the name of the object. The Attribute toolbar for the object appears at the
the 3D Viewer bottom of the GOCAD window.

4-42 Visualizing Data in Maps GOCAD® 2009.1 User Guide

 Part
III

Visualization
4.6 Visualizing Features on a Map
You can visualize features on a map in the same way you visualize them in the 3D Viewer.
For more information, see Part IV: Foundation Modeling, "Visualizing Features" on
page 8-9. For general information about features, see Part IV: Foundation Modeling,
"What Are Features?" on page 8-2.

Rock & Fluid Canvas™ 2009 | Epos™ 4.0 4.6 Visualizing Features on a Map 4-43
Paradigm™

4.7 Editing Map View Settings

You can change the dimensions of the map, the projection distance, and the scale by
using View Settings on the View toolbar. The settings are similar to those on the
Create Map dialog box, except there is one additional option to fit the map to a page.
You can also use to check the total size of the map before you print it.

To view the total size

1 In a Map window, click View Settings on the View toolbar to open the dialog
of the map or fit it to
box.
a page

Most of the settings are the same as for the Create Map dialog box. This procedure
explains only the differences. For information about the other settings, see "To create
a map from objects" on page 4-3.
2 To view the total size of the map, under Map scale and paper size, see the
information in the Total paper size area. Unlike the map paper size, the total paper
size accounts for not only the data but also for the other elements in the view such as
the legend, scale bar, and color bar.
3 If you want to scale the map data so that the map will fit on a specific paper size
when printed, select the Fit to page check box, and then do one of the following:
• If you want to specify a predefined paper size (A4, Letter, Legal, and so on), select
it in the box on the right.
• If you want to define a custom page size, select Other in the box on the right,
and then type the width and height of the paper in the boxes below.
When you change this setting, the information in the Map scale box updates
automatically. The orientation of the printed page is assumed to be portrait.
4 Click OK to carry out the command and close the dialog box, or click Apply to carry
out the command and leave the dialog box open.

4-44 Visualizing Data in Maps GOCAD® 2009.1 User Guide

 Part
III

Visualization
4.8 Measuring Distances and Areas on a Map
In the Map window, you can use Get Distance on the Selection toolbar to measure
the distance between two points or a series of points on a map. For example, you can
measure the distance across an anticline in a reservoir or the distance around its
perimeter. See Figure 4–9. The distance is the 2D distance in the x- and y-directions; the
z-direction is not accounted for. Similarly, you can compute an area on a map by using
Get Area , which is also on the Selection toolbar. For example, you can compute the
area of the top of an anticline where oil is likely trapped. See Figure 4–10. The result of
the distance or area computation appears on the status bar at the bottom of the window.

Figure 4–9 Measuring distances

Rock & Fluid Canvas™ 2009 | Epos™ 4.0 4.8 Measuring Distances and Areas on a Map 4-45
Paradigm™

Figure 4–10 Measuring

area

For information, see:

• "To measure distances on a map," page 4-46
• "To compute an area on a map," page 4-47

To measure distances
♦ On the Selection toolbar, click Get Distance , and then do the following:
on a map
a On the map, left-click the points you want to measure the distance between until
you reach the last point. If you make a mistake, undo a point by clicking the
middle mouse button. The cumulative distance appears on the status bar as you
click each point.

b Right-click the last point to get the final distance and return to the pointer.
The cumulative distance between all the points appears on the status bar. The unit of
measure is the areal unit specified in your project.
Note As you click the points, squares represent each point and a line segment appears between the
points to represent the distance you are measuring. It appears as though the command is creating a
curve, but it is not. The curve disappear from the view after you right-click the final point.

4-46 Visualizing Data in Maps GOCAD® 2009.1 User Guide

 Part
III

Visualization
To compute an area 1 On the Selection toolbar, click Get Area , and then draw a polygon on the map
on a map in the location you want to compute the area:
a Left-click to define the point where you want the polygon to start and each
successive polygon point except the last one.
b Right-click the last point.
2 When you are finished computing areas, click Pan or right-click on the map
again to switch the pointer back to the pan mode.
The area of the polygon appears on the status bar. The unit of measure is the areal unit
specified in your project.
Note As you click the points, squares represent each point, a line segment appears between the
points, and a fill represents the area to be measured. It appears as though the command is creating
a polygon, but it is not. The polygon disappears from the view after you right-click the final point.

Rock & Fluid Canvas™ 2009 | Epos™ 4.0 4.8 Measuring Distances and Areas on a Map 4-47
Paradigm™

4.9 Editing Maps

For information, see:
• "Working with Comments in Maps," page 4-48
• "Reshaping Contour Lines," page 4-49

4.9.1 Working with Comments in Maps

You can annotate a map by inserting comment text, which is displayed in a location on
the map that you specify (for an example, see Figure 4–11). After you insert a comment,
you can easily edit or delete it.

Figure 4–11 Comment on

a map

For information, see:

• "To insert a comment in a map," page 4-48
• "To show or hide comments in a map," page 4-49
• "To edit a comment in a map," page 4-49
• "To delete a comment in a map," page 4-49

To insert a comment 1 In a Map window, click Select Objects on the Selection toolbar, right-click in
in a map the map where you want to insert the comment, and click Add Comment to open
the dialog box.

2 In the CompositePlot box, select the name of the map or maps on which you want
to place a comment.
3 In the Text box, type the text that you want to appear in the comment.
Tip You can easily 4 Click OK to carry out the command and close the dialog box, or click Apply to carry
reposition a comment by out the command and leave the dialog box open.
dragging it to any location
on a map. The comment that you typed in step 3 appears in the map. The comment appears in the
location where you right-clicked in step 1.

4-48 Visualizing Data in Maps GOCAD® 2009.1 User Guide

 Part
III

Visualization
To show or hide ♦ In a Map window, click Show Comments on the Attributes toolbar.
comments in a map

To edit a comment in ♦ In a Map window, do either of the following:

a map
• Right-click the line connecting the comment to the map, and then click Edit
Comment. In the Text box of the dialog box that opens, edit the text, and then
click OK. The dialog box closes, and the edited comment text is displayed on the
map.
• Double-click the comment that you want to edit. In the text box that opens, edit
the text, and then press ENTER. The text box closes, and the edited comment text
is displayed on the map.

To delete a comment ♦ In a Map window, right-click the line connecting the comment to the map, and then
in a map click Remove Comment.

4.9.2 Reshaping Contour Lines

You can change the shape of contour lines for 2D-Grid and Surface objects displayed on a
contour map. Before reshaping, optionally, you can specify a radius of influence (the area
of the map that will be modified) and set the number of control nodes that will appear on
the contour line to be reshaped.
When you change the shape of contours on a map, the shape (geometry) of the displayed
2D-Grid or Surface object will also change in the 3D Viewer. If the contour lines
represents depth, the representation of the z value will change; if the contour lines
represent a property, the property values will change.
Note If you display a property and the contour lines for that property on a map, the color
map is automatically recalculated to assign a distinct color to each contour interval.

To reshape contour 1 In a Map window, click Select Objects on the Selection toolbar.
lines
Tip To help determine the 2 To specify a radius of influence, right-click the contour map, click Radius of
radius of influence value to Influence to open the dialog box, and then do this:
use, use Get Distance Note The number in parentheses following the Radius of Influence shortcut command is the
to estimate the distance last value that was specified or, if no value was previously specified, the default value.
between contour lines.

a Select the value to be used for the radius of influence in the unit selected for the
project.
b Click OK to carry out the command and close the dialog box, or click Apply to
carry out the command and leave the dialog box open.

Rock & Fluid Canvas™ 2009 | Epos™ 4.0 4.9 Editing Maps 4-49
Paradigm™

3 To specify the number of control nodes that will appear on the contour line to be
reshaped, right-click in the map, point to Number of Control Nodes, click Set
Number of Control Nodes to open the dialog box, and then do this:
Note The number in parentheses following the Number of Control Nodes shortcut command
is the last value that was specified, or, if no value was previously specified, the default value.

a Enter the number of control nodes that you want to display.

b Click OK to carry out the command and close the dialog box, or click Apply to
carry out the command and leave the dialog box open.
4 Right-click in the map, and click Reshape to activate the reshaping tool.
5 Click the contour line that you want to reshape. Control nodes appear on the contour
line that you clicked. If you specified a number in step 3, the number of nodes that
you specified appears; otherwise, the number of nodes displayed is the default value.
6 Drag a point on the highlighted contour line to reshape the line.
The modified contour line is used as input data, the property or elevation is recomputed
using this new information, and then the contours are regenerated. The original property
is modified in the 3D Viewer as well as in the Map window. The command recalculates
the shape of the contours on the map.

4-50 Visualizing Data in Maps GOCAD® 2009.1 User Guide

 5
Visualizing Data in Geologic
Cross Sections

In this chapter • "Quick Tour of the Cross Section • "Working with Logs in a Cross Section
Window," page 5-2 View," page 5-27
• "Components of a Cross Section • "Working with Well Markers in a
View," page 5-5 Cross Section View," page 5-30
• "Creating a Cross Section View," • "Displaying Features, Objects, and
page 5-7 Properties in a Cross Section View,"
page 5-31
• "Opening an Existing Cross Section
View," page 5-25 • "Displaying Cross Sections in the
3D Viewer," page 5-51
• "Working with Tracks in a Cross
Section View," page 5-26 • "Changing Layout and View Settings
in a Cross Section View," page 5-56

Overview These topics describe the components of Cross Section objects (geologic cross sections)
and how to create and work with them in Paradigm™ GOCAD® 2009. When you
visualize three-dimensional objects and data in 2D, you see the cross section view of the
data "sliced" by the cross section.

5-1
Paradigm™

5.1 Quick Tour of the Cross Section Window

When you create a cross section view, the Cross Section window opens. Figure 5–1
shows an example.

Figure 5–1 Cross Section window

z
1
z 4

z
2
z3

z 5

z 6

z 7

z
8

z 1 Menu bar. You can access commands for manipulating the view, undoing and
redoing operations, editing the legend, exporting, printing, saving, copying,
editing stratigraphy, and getting help. For more information about these
commands, see:
• "Exporting as a Graphics File, Printing, Saving, and Copying a 2D View,"
page 1-15
• "Displaying Legends, Color Bars, and Scale Bars in a 2D View," page 1-17
• "Building and Working with Stratigraphic Columns," page 10-15

z 2 Task Pane. You can access the Objects tab and the Pillar Templates tab, which
list all of the items that you can work with in the cross section view including
pillars, tracks, objects, well data such as logs and markers, and templates. The
Objects tab in this view works in a similar manner to the Object Tree in the
GOCAD window. From this tab, you can show and hide items in the cross section
view and access commands for the objects and data in the list.
By using the Pillar Templates tab, you can create and work with pillar templates.

5-2 Visualizing Data in Geologic Cross Sections GOCAD® 2009.1 User Guide
 Part
III

Visualization
For more information, see:
• Part I: Getting Started, "Working in the Task Pane," page 1-20
• "Creating and Working with Pillar Templates," page 3-61

z 3 View. This area is where you can display and manipulate the 2D cross section
view. Measurements along the horizontal (x) axis indicate the distance across the
cross section view. Measurements along the vertical axis (z) indicate time or
depth.
For more information, see "Components of a Cross Section View" on page 5-5.
For information about the types of tracks you can display in the view, see
"Components of a Log Display" on page 3-5.

z 4 Selection toolbar. You can change the action of the pointer to select objects,
pan the view vertically or horizontally, measure distances, or remove an object.
For more information about measuring distances, see "Measuring Distance in the
Active View" on page 1-29.

z 5 View toolbar. You can change the view by zooming. You can also access the
view settings so that you can change the scale and dimensions of the view. For
more information, see "Setting the Display in 2D Windows" on page 1-8 and
"Editing View Settings in a Cross Section View" on page 5-58.

z 6 File toolbar. You can save the cross section view to a CGM, bitmap, or GIF file;
copy the cross section view to the clipboard; and print the view. For more
information, see "Exporting as a Graphics File, Printing, Saving, and Copying a
2D View" on page 1-15.

z 7 Options toolbar. You can show the legend, a color bar for each displayed
property, and grid lines in the cross section view. For more information, see
"Setting Display Options in a 2D View" on page 1-9.

z 8 Coordinates toolbar. You can track the location of the pointer and show a
visual guide, which spans the view and represents the x- and z-axes as dashed
lines with the origin at the location of the pointer. You can synchronize these
tools with the pointer in the 3D Viewer and other Epos applications. For more
information, see "Synchronizing the Pointer Between the 3D Viewer, 2D Views,
and Epos Applications" on page 1-13.

z 9 Cross Section toolbar. You can show or hide the header, change the color of
the main axes on the top and both sides of the view, and color fill between
surfaces displayed in the view. For more information about these operations, see:
• "Changing the Layout in a Cross Section View," page 5-56
• "Changing the Main Axes in a Cross Section View," page 5-58
• "Filling a Structural Interpretation with Solid Painting," page 5-38.

z10 Attribute toolbar. Before you select an object on the Objects tab or in the view,
the Attribute toolbar displays "Nothing Selected." The Attribute toolbar in this
view works the same way as the one in the GOCAD window. When you select an
object, the Attribute toolbar displays tools that are specific to the type of object
selected.
For more information about object attributes and the attribute toolbars, see:
• Part I: Getting Started, "Attribute Manager (Attributes Tab)," page 1-32
• Part I: Getting Started, "Attribute Toolbars," page 1-43

Rock & Fluid Canvas™ 2009 | Epos™ 4.0 5.1 Quick Tour of the Cross Section Window 5-3
Paradigm™

z11 Other toolbars (not shown). Some toolbars are initially hidden, and additional
toolbars are available if the project includes the Well Correlation and
Stratigraphic Analysis module, or if you create a cross section from a voxet
section.
• Well Curves toolbar. You can edit a well curve (log curve) in a log track by
using the pointer. For information, see Part IV: Foundation Modeling,
"Editing a Well Log in a Cross Section or Log Display" on page 7-10.
• Interpretation toolbar. If you load the Well Correlation and Stratigraphic
Analysis module, you can access the Features Manager, create interpreted
objects, select objects, digitize and edit correlation lines, and flatten the
display at a horizon marker. For more information, see Part VII: Geologic
Interpretation, "Interpretation Toolbar for a Cross Section View" on
page 2-21.
• Well Picks toolbar. If you load the Well Correlation and Stratigraphic
Analysis module, you can add and reposition markers for one or more wells,
correlate logs, and copy markers. For more information, see Part VII:
Geologic Interpretation, "Adding and Editing Markers by Using the Well
Picks Toolbar" on page 2-12.
• Well Intervals toolbar. You can interpret facies, edit facies boundaries,
move facies intervals, and access the Facies Calculator. For more information,
see Part VII: Geologic Interpretation , "Interpreting and Editing Facies" on
page 2-18.
• Cross Section Set toolbar. If you create a cross section from a voxet
section, this toolbar appears near the bottom of the window. For
information, see "Cross Section Set toolbar" on page 5-4.

Cross Section Set When you create a cross section from a voxet section (see "Creating a Cross Section from
toolbar a Voxet Section or Probe" on page 5-13), this toolbar is available in the cross section
view.

Initially, the section you used to create the cross section appears in the view. You can use
the Cross Section Set toolbar to view additional sections by cycling through them with
these tools. The toolbar is similar to the Voxet Section toolbar that appears in the
GOCAD window (with the Volume Interpretation module). For more information, see
Part V: Seismic Interpretation Modeling, "Displaying Seismic Sections" on page 3-14.

5-4 Visualizing Data in Geologic Cross Sections GOCAD® 2009.1 User Guide
 Part
III

Visualization
5.2 Components of a Cross Section View
In GOCAD, a Cross Section object consists of one or more vertical planes that are oriented
at arbitrary angles in xy-space. When a Cross Section consists of multiple planes, the
planes are connected along their vertical edges so that you can view them side-by-side,
unfolded in 2D (also known as the cross section view). By creating Cross Sections that
"slice" through objects and data in a 3D reservoir model, you can see geologic cross
sections of your reservoir models.
In GOCAD 2009, the 2D view of a Cross Section object consists of the following
components:

Pillars Pillars anchor a cross section view vertically. The term "pillar" is derived from a similar
geometric feature in geologic fence diagrams. You can think of pillars as the "fence
posts" that define the boundaries of each plane in a cross section view.
If you want to display well logs or other data in a cross section view, one pillar should
intersect each well whose logs or other data you are interested in visualizing. When you
create a Cross Section by digitizing, each point you click during the digitization becomes a
"pillar" in the resulting cross section view. Be sure to click each well path for which you
want to display data when you digitize the Cross Section or use the Create a Pillar from
Well command (for more information, see "To create a cross section view from picks and
wells" on page 5-7, step 5).
Figure 5–2 shows how pillars look in the 3D Viewer, and Figure 5–3 shows how they look
in the cross section view.

Panels In a cross section view, each plane between two pillars is called a panel. When you
digitize a Cross Section, the panels correspond to the line segments drawn between
mouse clicks. Panels are scaled according to the horizontal and vertical scaling ratio of the
screen. Figure 5–2 shows how panels look in the 3D Viewer, and Figure 5–3 shows them
unfolded in a cross section view.

Figure 5–2 Cross Section

shown in the 3D Viewer

Well pillar Pillar

Panel

Tracks You can display several types of data in a cross section view. When you display data in a
cross section view, you display each type in a specific type of track. For more information
about tracks and the types of data that you can display in a cross section view, see
"Components of a Log Display" on page 3-5.

Rock & Fluid Canvas™ 2009 | Epos™ 4.0 5.2 Components of a Cross Section View 5-5
Paradigm™

Figure 5–3 Pillars, panels, and tracks in a cross section view

Well pillar with Well pillar with Well pillar with
tracks hidden tracks displayed tracks displayed Pillar

Panel Panel Panel

5-6 Visualizing Data in Geologic Cross Sections GOCAD® 2009.1 User Guide
 Part
III

Visualization
5.3 Creating a Cross Section View
You can create cross section views from objects such as Wells, Curves, Voxets, and
Shotlines, as well as by digitizing points.
For information, see:
• "Creating a Cross Section View from Picks, Wells, and Curves," page 5-7
• "Creating a Cross Section from a Voxet Section or Probe," page 5-13
• "Creating a Series of Cross Sections," page 5-15
• "Creating a Cross Section Along a Horizontal Well," page 5-21
• "Creating a Cross Section View from a Shotline," page 5-23

5.3.1 Creating a Cross Section View from Picks,

Wells, and Curves
You can create a geologic cross section view by digitizing ("picking") points and selecting
wells or by quickly digitizing a curve in the 3D Viewer.
When you create a cross section view, the Cross Section window opens automatically.
This is where you can display and manipulate objects in a cross section view. For an
overview of the Cross Section window, see "Quick Tour of the Cross Section Window"
on page 5-2.
For information about how to create a cross section view from picks and wells or curves,
see:
• "To create a cross section view from picks and wells," page 5-7
• "To create a cross section view by digitizing only," page 5-12
Note You can also access the commands to create cross section views from the Map window. If you
access these commands from a map, note that in some cases, you need to digitize in the 3D Viewer,
not the map view.

Note You can also create specialized cross section views, including a seismic section (see "Creating
a Cross Section from a Voxet Section or Probe" on page 5-13) and a cross section view along a
horizontal well (see "Creating a Cross Section Along a Horizontal Well" on page 5-21). In addition,
you can create a series of cross section views to examine a structure at regular intervals (see
"Creating a Series of Cross Sections" on page 5-15).

To create a 1 Optionally, display any objects in the 3D Viewer that you want to use for reference
cross section view when you digitize points or select objects from which to create the cross section.
from picks and wells 2 In the Object Tree, right-click the Cross Section object category, and then click From
Picks and Wells to open the dialog box.
Tip You can also access this command from the Objects tab in the Map window. However, if
you access the command from a map, note that you need to select wells from the 3D Viewer,
not the map view.

Rock & Fluid Canvas™ 2009 | Epos™ 4.0 5.3 Creating a Cross Section View 5-7
Paradigm™

3 In the Cross Section name box, type a name for the new cross section view. For
information about object naming conventions, see Part I: Getting Started, "Naming
Objects" on page 3-7.
4 Click either Depth or Time to indicate whether you want to create the cross section
view in the depth or time domain.
Important If you click Depth, only objects in the depth domain are available in the
cross section view, and if you click Time, only objects in the time domain are
available.
5 To add pillars and define their locations in the x- and y-directions, do any combination
of the following.

To Do this
Create pillars associated Enter the names of the wells in the Add Wells box, and then click
with one or more wells
Create a Pillar from Well . The command accepts both Well
objects and wells within Group objects.
The command adds a pillar for each well you specify.
Create one pillar at a
specific location 1 Click Create a Pillar at Picked Location .
In the 3D Viewer, a temporary xy-plane appears that is at the
middle z of all displayed objects. The temporary blue plane is a
digitization aid.
2 Click within the 3D Viewer where you want to add the pillar.
The command adds a pillar that is perpendicular to the temporary
xy-plane.

5-8 Visualizing Data in Geologic Cross Sections GOCAD® 2009.1 User Guide
 Part
III

Visualization
To Do this
Create several pillars 1 Optionally, adjust the 3D Viewer settings: for easier and more

accurate digitization, we recommend setting Parallel View

on the Camera Snapshot and Options toolbar and Top

View on the Camera View toolbar.

2 Click Digitize Pillars , and then do the following:

a Click in the 3D Viewer where you want to place each pillar
except the last one. To "snap" to an object (a well, for
example), hold down CTRL, and then click. If you make a
mistake, you can undo the last pillar by clicking the middle
mouse button.
b To create the last pillar and end digitization, right-click where
you want the last pillar to appear.
Notes
• You can digitize in an empty area of the 3D Viewer, and the
cross section view will still intersect any data in that location,
whether the object is visible in the view or not.
• If you digitize a pillar on a well path, the well data will be associated
with the pillar. However, it is easier to create a well pillar with the
method described next.

The table in the middle of the panel lists each pillar you add.

• Pillars. This column lists the defined pillars. The Pillar label indicates a digitized
point that is not at the location of a well. If the pillar is associated with a well, the
column lists the name of the well.
• X and Y. These columns list the coordinates of the pillars in the x- and
y-directions, in the units of the project.
• Method and Value. If the pillar is not located at a well, the Method is always
Pick.

Note If the method is Pick, you can click in the Value box to pick another point.

Tip In GOCAD, a pillar is For a pillar located at a well, there are several methods for defining the x- and
always vertical, whereas the y-directions, some of which require you to enter a value.
path of the associated well
might be deviated. You 6 If you want to refine the pillar definitions before you create the cross section view, do
should specify the location any of the following.
on the well path where you
want to place the pillar—for
example, at the well head, a To Do this
specific well marker, or the Change the order of a pillar Click the pillar in the table) that you want to move, and then click
total depth of the well.
Move Selected Row Up or Move Selected Row Down .
Pillars will be connected in the order they are listed.
Delete one or more pillars Select the pillars in the table, and then click Remove Selected
Rows .

Rock & Fluid Canvas™ 2009 | Epos™ 4.0 5.3 Creating a Cross Section View 5-9
Paradigm™

To Do this
Move a pillar that is not Type a new value in the X or Y box for the pillar.
associated with a well – or –

In the Value box, click , and then click the location in the
3D Viewer.
Move a well pillar by Select the method you want to use to define the areal location of the
changing the method pillar:
• Well Head. Uses the x and y at the location of the well head.
• Well MD. Uses the x and y at a measured depth along the well
path; type the measured depth you want to use in the Value box.
• Well TD. Uses the x and y at the total depth of the well.
• Pick. Uses the xy-coordinates at the point you click on the well
path. In the Value box, click , and then click the location in the
3D Viewer.
• Marker. Uses the x and y at the location of a marker. Select the
name of the marker in the Value box.

Tip You can change the 7 In the Use maximum projection distance box, type a value specifying the limitation
maximum projection that you want to impose for projecting objects onto the cross section view (the
distance later by using the
default is a calculation of the cross section view height divided by 500).
Dimension Settings dialog
box. For information, see – or –
"Editing View Settings in a
Cross Section View" on
Click Get 3D and 2D Distances , and then drag a line in the 3D Viewer to get
page 5-58.
the distance you want to use.
Only objects that fall within that distance in front of or behind the cross section view
panels are available in the cross section view. Objects that are further away (by
orthogonal projection distance) are not available in the cross section view.
Note For information about the types of objects that you can project on a cross section, see
"Displaying Features, Objects, and Properties in a Cross Section View" on page 5-31.

Tip Later, you can change 8 To define the vertical extension of the cross section, type a value for the top of the
the ratio of the horizontal cross section view in the Top box, and then type a value for the bottom of the
and vertical dimensions by cross section view in the Bottom box.
turning off Lock Aspect
Ratio. For more – or –
information, see "Locking
the Aspect Ratio in a Cross
To define the top or bottom by computing from objects, click Guess .
Section View" on
page 5-61.
Note Data values are expressed in the unit of measure specified when you created the project.
Whether the cross section view is in the time domain or in the depth domain depends on the
objects on which you digitize the pillars.

9 To check the dimensions of the cross section view before you create it, see the
information in the Width dimension and the Height dimension boxes. These
values are calculated for you; you cannot edit them.
• Width dimension. This value is the horizontal extension of the cross section
view; it is the sum of each panel length.
• Height dimension. This value is the vertical extension of the cross section view.
It is the difference between the specified top and bottom values.

5-10 Visualizing Data in Geologic Cross Sections GOCAD® 2009.1 User Guide
 Part
III

Visualization
10 If you want to control the size for displaying and printing the cross section view,
expand the Cross Section panels scale and paper size area, and do any of the
following:
Note Panels are scaled according to the horizontal and vertical scaling ratio of the screen.

To Do this
Change the scale Do one of the following:
• In the Horizontal & vertical scales area, enter the number of
units in the cross section view that you want to include per inch or
centimeter of paper. Enter the horizontal scale in the box on the
left and the vertical scale in the box on the right.
– or –
• To define the scale values from objects used to create the
cross section view, click .

Important Specifying the scale controls the size of the data only.
Before printing, you can view the total paper size in the Dimension
Settings dialog box and make adjustments if needed. For more
information, see "Editing View Settings in a Cross Section View" on
page 5-58.
Change the units for In the Paper unit box, select cm (centimeters) or in (inches).
display and printing

Note Accepted values for the scale are positive numbers with precision up to the thousandth
decimal place.

11 Click OK to carry out the command and close the dialog box, or click Apply to carry
out the command and leave the dialog box open.
When you create a cross section view, the following occurs:
• The Cross Section window opens and displays the cross section view. For an
overview of this window, see "Quick Tour of the Cross Section Window" on
page 5-2.
• In the Object Tree, the name of the new cross section view appears under
Cross Section in the list.
Tip You can create more • A new view is created in the project. For more information about views, see "Opening
than one view of the same
an Existing Cross Section View" on page 5-25.
cross section by opening a
new Cross Section window. Note If you change the settings in the Create Cross Section from Picks and Wells dialog box and
For information, see then click Apply again, the command creates another cross section view and opens another
"Opening a New 2D Cross Section window. If you do not change the name, the command adds _n to the name, where
Window" on page 1-11. n starts with zero.

Rock & Fluid Canvas™ 2009 | Epos™ 4.0 5.3 Creating a Cross Section View 5-11
Paradigm™

To create a To quickly create a cross section view by digitizing, do the following. However, if you want
cross section view by to create pillars associated with wells, we recommend the command Create
digitizing only Cross Section from Picks and Wells, so that you have the opportunity to review and
refine your selections before you create the cross section view (see "To create a
cross section view from picks and wells" on page 5-7).
1 Optionally, display any objects in the 3D Viewer that you want to use for reference
when creating the cross section view. If you intend to visualize well logs on the
cross section view, display the wells in the 3D Viewer.
Tip You can also create a cross section view by digitizing from the Map window. The steps
are the same as those in this procedure except that you use the View area and browser in the
Map window instead of the 3D Viewer and browser in the GOCAD window.

2 Optionally, adjust the 3D Viewer view settings. For easier and more accurate
digitization, we recommend setting Parallel View on the Camera Snapshot
and Options toolbar and Top View on the Camera View toolbar. However, you
may find it easier to "snap" the cursor to a well path during digitization if you tilt the
camera slightly.
3 In the Object Tree, right-click Cross Section, and then click From Digitized
Polyline.
4 Do the following to digitize the cross section view trace:
a Left-click in the 3D Viewer where you want to place each pillar except the last
one. To "snap" to an object (a well, for example), hold down CTRL, and then
click. If you make a mistake, undo the last pillar by clicking the middle mouse
button.
b To create the last pillar and end digitization, right-click where you want the last
pillar to appear.
When you finish digitizing, the following occurs:
• The Cross Section window opens and displays the cross section view. For an
overview of this window, see "Quick Tour of the Cross Section Window" on
page 5-2.
• In the Object Tree, the name of the cross section view appears in the Cross Section
list. The default name is DigitizedCrossSection (if you digitize more than one, the
command adds _ n to the name, where n starts with zero).
• A new view is created in the project. For more information about views, see "Opening
an Existing Cross Section View" on page 5-25.
Tip You can create more than one view of the same cross section view by opening a new
Cross Section window. For information, see "Opening a New 2D Window" on page 1-11.

Note The command uses the objects displayed in the 3D Viewer to define the top and bottom of
the cross section view . The maximum projection distance (which defines how close an object must
be to a cross section view panel in order for you to project the object onto the cross section
view ) is the height of the cross section view divided by 500. You can change the values for the top
and the bottom of the cross section view and for the maximum projection distance by using the
Dimension Settings dialog box—for information, see "Editing View Settings in a Cross Section
View" on page 5-58.

5-12 Visualizing Data in Geologic Cross Sections GOCAD® 2009.1 User Guide
 Part
III

Visualization
5.3.2 Creating a Cross Section from a Voxet Section
or Probe
You can create a cross section view from a voxet section along any axis. A typical
approach is to slice a structure along the crossline or inline of a seismic cube. For an
example, see Figure 5–4. Another approach is to slice a structure using a voxet Fence
probe.
Note Creating a cross section from a Fence probe requires the Volume Interpretation module.

For information, see:

• "To create a cross section from a voxet section," page 5-13
• "To create a cross section from a voxet Fence probe," page 5-14
• "To create a cross section from a voxet Fence probe (simplified)," page 5-15

Figure 5–4 Cross section

created from a voxet
section

To create a cross 1 In the 3D Viewer, display the voxet, the voxet property, and the section you want to
section from a voxet use to create the cross section.
section 2 Hold down CTRL, right-click the voxet section, and then click Open Section.
When you create a cross section from a voxet section, the following occurs:
• The Cross Section window opens and displays the cross section; the voxet section
and property appear in the view. For an example, see Figure 5–4. For an overview of
the window, see "Quick Tour of the Cross Section Window" on page 5-2.
• In the Object Tree, the name of the cross section appears in the Cross Section list. The
naming convention is VoxetName _ AxisIdentifier_xs (if you create more than one cross

Rock & Fluid Canvas™ 2009 | Epos™ 4.0 5.3 Creating a Cross Section View 5-13
Paradigm™

section along the same axis, the command adds _n to the name, where n starts with
zero).
• A new view is created in the project. For more information about views, see "Opening
an Existing Cross Section View" on page 5-25.
Tip You can create more than one view of the same cross section by opening a new Cross Section
window. For information, see "Opening a New 2D Window" on page 1-11.

To create a cross With this method, you can specify the plot for displaying and printing the cross section
section from a voxet (the number of horizontal and vertical units per inch). To create a cross section using the
Fence probe default plot settings, complete the procedure "To create a cross section from a voxet
Fence probe (simplified)" on page 5-15 instead.
1 Optionally, in the 3D Viewer, display the voxet and the Fence probe that you want to
use to create the cross section.
2 In the Object Tree, right-click Cross Section, and then click From Fence to open the
dialog box.

3 In the Voxet box, select the voxet for which you want to create a cross section.
4 In the Probe name box, select the Fence probe that you want to use to create a cross
section.
Note The command will not create a cross section if the probe you select is any type other than
fence. To ensure that the selected probe is a Fence probe, in the Object Tree, right-click the
name of the probe, click Edit Probe, and, in the Probe type box of the Probe/Slicer Editor,
ensure that Fence is selected.

5 To specify the plot for displaying and printing the cross section, do this:
a In the Plot units/inch: vertical box, type the number of vertical units in the
cross section that you want to include per inch.
b In the Horizontal box, type the number of horizontal units in the cross section
that you want to include per inch.
Note Accepted values for plot units/inch are positive numbers with precision up to the
thousandth decimal place. Data values are expressed in the unit of measure selected when
you created the project.

6 In the Paper unit box, type cm (centimeters) or in (inches) to specify the units for
display and printing.
7 Click OK to carry out the command and close the dialog box, or click Apply to carry
out the command and leave the dialog box open.

5-14 Visualizing Data in Geologic Cross Sections GOCAD® 2009.1 User Guide
 Part
III

Visualization
When you create a cross section from a voxet Fence probe, the following occurs:
• The Cross Section window opens and displays the cross section. For an overview of
this window, see "Quick Tour of the Cross Section Window" on page 5-2.
• In the Object Tree, the name of the cross section appears in the Cross Section list. The
naming convention is CrossSection_ProbeName. If you create more than one cross
section from the same probe, the command adds _n to the name, where n is a
number. For the first name, the number is zero; for each subsequent name, the
number increments by one.
• A new view is created in the project. For more information about views, see "Opening
an Existing Cross Section View" on page 5-25.
Tip You can create more than one view of the same cross section by opening a new Cross Section
window. For information, see "Opening a New 2D Window" on page 1-11.

To create a cross With this method, you can create a cross section using the default plot settings for
section from a voxet displaying and printing the cross section (the number of horizontal and vertical units per
Fence probe inch). If you want to customize the plot settings, complete the procedure "To create a
(simplified) cross section from a voxet Fence probe" on page 5-14 instead.

♦ In the Object Tree, right-click the Fence probe, and then click Open Section.
The results are the same as in the previous procedure ("To create a cross section from a
voxet Fence probe" on page 5-14).
Note The command will not create a cross section if the probe you select is any type other than
fence. To ensure that the selected probe is a Fence probe, in the Object Tree, right-click the name of
the probe, click Edit Probe, and, in the Probe type box of the Probe/Slicer Editor, ensure that
Fence is selected.

5.3.3 Creating a Series of Cross Sections

You can see structural changes in regular intervals by creating a series of cross sections.
You can create the series from points, from grid sections, or from grid section geometry.
When you create a series of cross sections from points, you can define the views based on
any of the following:
• Three points. The top-left and top-right points define the horizontal direction and
extension of the cross section view. The top-left and bottom-left points define the
vertical direction and extension.
• Two points, the dip, and the vertical extent. The top-left and top-right points
define the horizontal direction and extension of the cross section view. The dip and
vertical extent define the vertical direction and extension.
• One point, the azimuth, the dip, and the horizontal extent. The dip and
horizontal extent define the horizontal direction and extension of the cross section
view. The azimuth and the vertical extent define the vertical direction and extension.
The latter two methods are useful when you know the orientation of the geologic
structure.
The grid section and grid section geometry methods are similar to one another, except
that the grid section method creates cross sections based on grid sections rather than
distance and the grid section geometry method creates cross sections based on distance
rather than steps.

Rock & Fluid Canvas™ 2009 | Epos™ 4.0 5.3 Creating a Cross Section View 5-15
Paradigm™

For information about how to create a series of cross sections, see:

• "To create multiple cross sections from points," page 5-16
• "To create multiple cross sections from grid sections," page 5-18
• "To create multiple cross sections from grid section geometry," page 5-20

To create multiple Tip Optionally, display any objects in the 3D Viewer that you want to use for reference when
cross sections from creating the cross sections.
points 1 In the Object Tree, right-click the Cross Section category, and then click Multiple
from Points to open the dialog box.

Geometry section
This part of the dialog box
defines the geometry of
the initial cross section (its
horizontal and vertical
direction and length).

Propagation section
This part of the dialog box
defines the number of
cross sections and their
spacing.

Tip If you want to use to digitize the points, position the model to be parallel to the
cross section views you want to create.
2 Do one of the following to create the initial cross section geometry:

To Do this
Create a series of cross 1 In the X, Y, and Z boxes of the Top_left, Top_right, and
sections defined by Bottom_left rows, enter the values to use for the x-, y-, and z-
values you specify for the coordinates for the three points you want to use.
top-left, top-right, and 2 Leave the displayed values in the Dip, Azimuth, Horizontal
bottom-right points extent, and Vertical extent boxes unchanged. These values will
not be used.
3 Click Three points.

5-16 Visualizing Data in Geologic Cross Sections GOCAD® 2009.1 User Guide
 Part
III

Visualization
To Do this
Create a series of cross 1 In the X, Y, and Z boxes of the Top_left and Top_right rows, enter
sections defined by the values to use for the x-, y-, and z-coordinates of the top-left
values you specify for the and top-right points.
top-left and top-right 2 In the Dip box, type the value in degrees to use for the plane
points, the dip, and the inclination. This value can range from 0 to 90, where 0 is horizontal
vertical extent and 90 is vertical.
3 In the Vertical extent box, type the value to use for the vertical
height of the cross section view. This value is expressed in the time
or depth unit you selected when you created the project.
4 Leave the displayed values in the Azimuth and Horizontal extent
boxes unchanged. These values will not be used.
5 Click Two points and dip.
Create a series of cross 1 In the X, Y, and Z boxes of the Top_left row, enter the values to
sections defined by use for the x-, y-, and z-coordinates of the top-left point.
values you specify for the 2 In the Dip box, type the value in degrees to use for the plane
top-left point, the dip, inclination. These values can range from 0 to 90, where 0 is
the azimuth, and the horizontal and 90 is vertical.
horizontal extent 3 In the Azimuth box, type the value in degrees to use for the angle
between the x-axis and the y-axis (that is, for the direction of the
cross section view). This value can range from 0 to 360, where 0 is
north.
4 In the Horizontal extent box, type the value to use for the
horizontal extension (that is, the horizontal length) of each section.
This value is expressed in the unit of measure you selected when
you created the project.
5 Leave the displayed value in the Vertical extent box unchanged.
This value will not be used.
6 Click One point azimuth and dip.

3 In the Number of sections box, type the number of cross sections that you want to
create.
4 In the Section spacing box, type a number to specify the distance between cross
sections in the areal unit of measure that you specified for the project.
5 In the Section name prefix box, type a prefix to use for the cross section view name.
For example, in the name "3points_xs_0," the prefix is "3points_xs." (For more
information about the conventions for naming objects, see Part I: Getting Started,
"Naming Objects" on page 3-7.)
6 If you want to specify the plot for displaying and printing or change the z-axis value,
click Advanced and then do the following:

Rock & Fluid Canvas™ 2009 | Epos™ 4.0 5.3 Creating a Cross Section View 5-17
Paradigm™

7 To specify the plot for displaying and printing the cross section view, do this:
a In the Plot units/inch: vertical box, type the number of vertical units in the
cross section view that you want to include per inch.
b In the Horizontal box, type the number of horizontal units in the cross section
view that you want to include per inch.
Notes
• Accepted values for plot units/inch are positive numbers with precision up to the
thousandth decimal place. Data values are expressed in the unit of measure selected
when you created the project.
• We recommend that you do not change the Time and Depth settings.

8 Click OK to carry out the command and close the dialog box, or click Apply to carry
out the command and leave the dialog box open.
When you create a series of cross sections from points, the following occurs:
• For each cross section that the command creates, a separate Cross Section window
opens and displays the cross section view. For an overview of this window, see "Quick
Tour of the Cross Section Window" on page 5-2.
• In the Object Tree, the name of each cross section view appears in the Cross Section
list. The naming convention is Prefix_n, where Prefix is the cross section view name
prefix that you specified in step 5 and n is a number that the command adds to each
name. For the first name, the number is zero; for each subsequent name, the number
increments by 1.
Important To avoid creating a large number of cross section views as you adjust the
settings, the command replaces existing cross section views if you use the same prefix
again.
• A new view for each cross section is created in the project. For more information
about views, see "Opening an Existing Cross Section View" on page 5-25.
Tip You can create more than one view of the same cross section by opening a new Cross Section
window. For information, see "Opening a New 2D Window" on page 1-11.

To create multiple 1 Optionally, display any objects in the 3D Viewer that you want to use for reference
cross sections from when creating the cross section views.
grid sections 2 In the Object Tree, right-click the Cross Section category, and then click Multiple
from Grid Sections to open the dialog box.

5-18 Visualizing Data in Geologic Cross Sections GOCAD® 2009.1 User Guide
 Part
III

Visualization
3 In the Grid object name box, select the Voxet or SGrid object from which you want
to create the cross sections.
4 In the Axis box, select the grid axis along which to create the cross sections.
5 In the First box, type the index of the grid section where you want the cross sections
to begin.
6 In the Last box, type the index of the grid section where you want the cross sections
to end. If you type -1, the cross sections will end at the last section of the grid.
7 In the Step box, type the number of grid sections from one cross section to the next.
For example, if you want to create a cross section view at every 10 grid sections, type
10.
8 In the Section name prefix box, type a prefix to use for the name of the
cross section view. For example, in the name "90_45_xs_0," the prefix is
"90_45_xs." (For more information about the conventions for naming objects, see
Part I: Getting Started, "Naming Objects" on page 3-7.)
9 To specify the plot for displaying and printing the cross section view, do the
following:
a In the Plot units/inch: vertical box, type the number of vertical units in the
cross section view that you want to display or print per inch.
b In the Horizontal box, type the number of horizontal units in the cross section
view that you want to display or print per inch.
Note Accepted values for plot units/inch are positive numbers with precision up to the
thousandth decimal place. Data values are expressed in the unit of measure selected when
you created the project.

10 Click OK to carry out the command and close the dialog box, or click Apply to carry
out the command and leave the dialog box open.
When you create cross sections from grid sections, the following occurs:
• The Cross Section window opens and displays the first cross section view in the
series. For an overview of this window, see "Quick Tour of the Cross Section
Window" on page 5-2.
• In the Object Tree, the name of each cross section view appears in the Cross Section
list. The naming convention is Prefix_n, where Prefix is the cross section view name
prefix that you specified in step 8 and n is a number that the command adds to each
name. For the first name, the number is zero; for each subsequent name, the number
increments by one.
Tip You can create more • A new view is created in the project for the first cross section view in the series. For
than one view of the same
more information about views, see "Opening an Existing Cross Section View" on
cross section by opening a
new Cross Section window.
page 5-25.
For information, see
"Opening a New 2D
Window" on page 1-11.

Rock & Fluid Canvas™ 2009 | Epos™ 4.0 5.3 Creating a Cross Section View 5-19
Paradigm™

To create multiple 1 Optionally, display any objects in the 3D Viewer that you want to use for reference
cross sections from when creating the cross section views.
grid section geometry 2 In the Object Tree, right-click the Cross Section category and then click Multiple
from Grid Section Geometry to open the dialog box.

3 In the Grid object name box, select the Voxet or SGrid object from which you want
to create the cross sections.
4 In the Axis box, select the grid object axis along which to create the cross sections.
5 In the Initial offset box, type the index of the grid section where you want the cross
sections to begin.
6 In the Section spacing box, type a number to specify the distance between adjacent
sections. The value is expressed in the areal unit of measure selected when you
created the project.
7 In the Number of sections box, type the number of cross sections to create.
8 In the Section name prefix box, type a prefix to use for the name of the
cross section view. For example, in the name "90_45_xs_0," the prefix is
"90_45_xs." (For more information about the conventions for naming objects, see
Part I: Getting Started, "Naming Objects" on page 3-7.)
9 If you want to specify the plot for displaying and printing the cross section view, click
Advanced and then do the following:

a In the Plot units/inch vertical box, type the number of vertical units per inch
that you want to include in the cross section view.
b In the Horizontal box, type the number of horizontal units per inch that you
want to include in the cross section view.
Note Accepted values for plot units/inch are positive numbers with precision up to the
thousandth decimal place. Data values are expressed in the unit of measure defined when
you created the project.

10 Click OK to carry out the command and close the dialog box, or click Apply to carry
out the command and leave the dialog box open.

5-20 Visualizing Data in Geologic Cross Sections GOCAD® 2009.1 User Guide
 Part
III

Visualization
When you create a cross section from grid section geometry, the following occurs:
• The Cross Section window opens and displays the first cross section view in the
series. For an overview of this window, see "Quick Tour of the Cross Section
Window" on page 5-2.
• In the Object Tree, the name of each cross section view appears in the Cross Section
list. The naming convention is Prefix_n, where Prefix is the prefix that you specified in
step 8 and n is an incremental number for each cross section view. For the first name,
the number is zero; for each subsequent name, the number increments by one.
Tip You can create more • A new view is created in the project for the first cross section view in the series. For
than one view of the same
more information about views, see "Opening an Existing Cross Section View" on
cross section by opening a
new Cross Section window.
page 5-25.
For information, see
"Opening a New 2D
Window" on page 1-11.

5.3.4 Creating a Cross Section Along a Horizontal

Well
Instead of digitizing in the 3D Viewer, you can use the Create Along Horizontal Well
command to create a cross section optimized to follow the path of a horizontal well.
Figure 5–5 shows an example of this type of cross section in both the 3D Viewer and the
Cross Section window.
Note You can also create a cross section view along a horizontal well from the Map window.

Figure 5–5 Cross section

of a horizontal well

Rock & Fluid Canvas™ 2009 | Epos™ 4.0 5.3 Creating a Cross Section View 5-21
Paradigm™

To create a cross 1 Do any of the following to open the dialog box:

section along a
• In the Object Tree, right-click the Cross Section category, and then click New
horizontal well
From Horizontal Well.
Tip You can also create a cross section view along a horizontal well by accessing this
command in the Map window. In the Map window browser, right-click Cross Section,
and then click New From Horizontal Well. The remaining steps are the same as those in
this procedure; however, if you want to pick wells you must do so from the 3D Viewer in
the GOCAD window, not the in the map view.

• In the Object Tree, right-click the name of a well, and then click Create Section
Along Horizontal Well.
• In the 3D Viewer, right-click a well, and then click Create Section Along
Horizontal Well.

2 In the Well box, enter the name of the well from which you want to create the cross
section.
3 If you want to change the limitation on the number of panels to allow in the
cross section view (the default is five), type the number in the Max panes box.
Tip To plan the number of panels you want in the cross section view, you can look at the well in top
view and count the number of doglegs in the well path.

4 In the Max distance box, type the maximum distance you want to allow between
panels and the well path.
Because you are trying to approximate the trajectory of a curved path with only
segments, the distance to use depends on the curvature of the path. Entering a lower
number typically increases the number of panels in the cross section view and causes
the cross section to follow the path more closely. Entering a greater distance typically
decreases the number of panels and results in a cross section view with panels that do
not follow the well path as closely.

Tip To determine the maximum distance, you can change to Top View , and then use Get 3D

and 2D Distances to measure in the 3D Viewer. Also consider whether you want the
cross section view to intersect a certain geologic feature (a fault, for example).

5 If you want to change the plot for displaying and printing the cross section view, do
any of the following:
• In the Vertical box, type the number of vertical units in the cross section view
that you want to include per inch.

5-22 Visualizing Data in Geologic Cross Sections GOCAD® 2009.1 User Guide
 Part
III

Visualization
• In the Horizontal box, type the number of horizontal units in the cross section
view that you want to include per inch.
Notes

• If you leave the zero in the boxes, the scale will be computed automatically.
• Accepted values for plot units/inch are positive numbers with precision up to the
thousandth decimal place.

6 Click OK to carry out the command and close the dialog box, or click Apply to carry
out the command and leave the dialog box open.
When you create a cross section from a horizontal well, the following occurs:
• The Cross Section window opens and displays the cross section view; the horizontal
well appears in the view. For an example, see Figure 5–5. For an overview of the
window, see "Quick Tour of the Cross Section Window" on page 5-2.
• In the Object Tree, the name of the cross section view appears in the Cross Section
list. The naming convention is xs_WellName (if you create more than one
cross section view from the same horizontal well, the command adds _ n to the name,
where n starts with zero).
Tip You can create more • A new view is created in the project. For more information about views, see "Opening
than one view of the same an Existing Cross Section View" on page 5-25.
cross section by opening a
new Cross Section window.
For information, see
"Opening a New 2D
Window" on page 1-11.

5.3.5 Creating a Cross Section View from a Shotline

To create a 1 Optionally, display any objects in the 3D Viewer that you want to use for reference
cross section view when creating the cross section views.
from a shotline 2 In the Object Tree, right-click the Cross Section category, and then click From
Shotline to open the dialog box.

3 In the Shotline seismic line box, enter the name of the Shotline object from which
to create the cross section view.
4 In the Plot units/inch vertical box, type the vertical scale at which you want to
display the cross section view.

Rock & Fluid Canvas™ 2009 | Epos™ 4.0 5.3 Creating a Cross Section View 5-23
Paradigm™

5 In the Horizontal box, type the horizontal scale at which you want to display the
cross section view.
Note If you accept the default scale units of zero, the command automatically computes the
display scale.

6 In the Paper unit box, type the units used to calculate the scale for printing and
display, either in (inches) or cm (centimeters). For example, 1000 meters (m) per inch
(in) means that every 1000 meters of the plot will be represented by 1 paper inch.
7 In the Property box, select the property associated with the shotline that you want to
display in the view.
8 Click OK to carry out the command and close the dialog box, or click Apply to carry
out the command and leave the dialog box open.
When you create a cross section from a shotline, the following occurs:
• The Cross Section window opens and displays the cross section view; the shotline
appears in the view. For an example, see Figure 5–5. For an overview of the window,
see "Quick Tour of the Cross Section Window" on page 5-2.
• In the Object Tree, the name of the cross section view appears in the Cross Section
list. The naming convention is CrossSection_ShotlineName (if you create more than
one cross section view from the same shotline, the command adds _n to the name,
where n starts with zero).
Tip You can create more • A new view is created in the project. For more information about views, see "Opening
than one view of the same an Existing Cross Section View" on page 5-25.
cross section by opening a
new Cross Section window.
For information, see
"Opening a New 2D
Window" on page 1-11.

5-24 Visualizing Data in Geologic Cross Sections GOCAD® 2009.1 User Guide
 Part
III

Visualization
5.4 Opening an Existing Cross Section View
When you create a cross section view, a new Cross Section window opens, automatically
creating a new view. If you want to create another view of the same cross section, you
can open a new Cross Section window—for more information, see "Opening a New 2D
Window" on page 1-11.
After you create a view, you can close it and then reopen it at any time.
Note The view and the work you do are stored in your computer's memory. You can close the
Cross Section window without losing the work you did in the view. However, if you want the view
to be available the next time you open the project, you must save the project.

To open a ♦ Do either of the following:

cross section view
• In the Object Tree, expand the Cross Section category, right-click the name of
the cross section view, point to Open View, and then click the view you want to
open.
• On the View menu, point to Open Existing, and then click the name of the view
that you want to open.
A Cross Section window opens and displays the cross section view.

Rock & Fluid Canvas™ 2009 | Epos™ 4.0 5.4 Opening an Existing Cross Section View 5-25
Paradigm™

5.5 Working with Tracks in a Cross Section

View
In a cross section view, you can display scale, log, interval, stratigraphy,
chronostratigraphy, seismic, synthetic, and schematic tracks. You can also create and
apply a template to standardize the look of tracks for all of the pillars in the view, or you
can adjust the tracks for pillars individually.
In a cross section view, you can work with tracks the same way that you do in a
log display view.
For information about how to work with tracks for an individual pillar, see "Working with
Tracks" on page 3-18.
For information about how to create and apply a template, see "Creating and Working
with Pillar Templates" on page 3-61.

5-26 Visualizing Data in Geologic Cross Sections GOCAD® 2009.1 User Guide
 Part
III

Visualization
5.6 Working with Logs in a Cross Section
View
When you create a cross section view with wells, any existing well logs automatically
appear on the Objects tab under log tracks and interval tracks categories. You can then
create and apply a template to standardize the logs for all of the pillars, or you can adjust
the logs for individual pillars. For information about how to create and apply a template,
see "Creating and Working with Pillar Templates" on page 3-61.
In a cross section view, you can work with logs for individual pillars the same way that you
do in a log display view, with the exception of adding an external log. In both log display
views and cross section views, you can extract a curve from a stratigraphic grid property
or a voxet property along the well path and add it to a track. In log display views, you can
additionally extract a log from another well and show the log curve in the same track for
comparison.
In either view, you can show as many logs as you want and adjust their appearance. In
addition to changing the color, line width, and pattern of a log curve, you can fill the log
curves by using various methods and show or hide the log header above the track.
Note To adjust the appearance of a log in an interval track, you need to edit the classification. For
more information, see Part IV: Foundation Modeling, "Defining Classifications" on page 10-2.

For information about what you can do with log data, how to show and hide logs in
tracks, and how to change the graphic attributes of logs in tracks, see "Working with
Logs in Tracks" on page 3-39.
For information about how to add an external log in a cross section view, see:
• "About adding an external log to a cross section view," page 5-27
• "To add an external log to a cross section view," page 5-28
• "To add an external log to an interval track in a cross section view," page 5-29

About adding an In a cross section view, you can add an external log to a log track or to an interval track
external log to a from either of these external sources:
cross section view
• Stratigraphic grid property extracted from cells along the well path.
• Voxet property extracted from cells along the well path.
When you add an external log, the command gives the log a new name specifying the log
source. This convention ensures any existing logs on the well with the same name are not
overwritten.

Rock & Fluid Canvas™ 2009 | Epos™ 4.0 5.6 Working with Logs in a Cross Section View 5-27
Paradigm™

To add an external 1 Right-click the name of the log track on the Objects tab or in the view, and then click
log to a cross section Add External Log to open the dialog box.
view

2 In the Cross Section box, enter the name of the cross section view to which you
want to add an external log.
3 Do one of the following:
• To add one or more logs from a stratigraphic grid, click from SGrid, enter the
stratigraphic grid in the Stratigraphic grid name box, enter the properties you
want to add to the track in the SGrid property box, and then, in the Method
box, select the method that you want to use for extracting the properties from
the grid cells along the well path.
For information about the available methods, see "Methods for extracting a
curve from a stratigraphic grid" on page 3-44.
• To add one or more logs from a voxet, click from Voxet, enter the name of the
voxet in the Voxet name box, and then enter the names of the properties that
you want to add to the track in the Voxet property box.
• To add one or more logs from a well, click from Well, enter the well in the Well
name box, and then enter the properties you want to add to the track in the
Well property box.
4 Do one of the following:
• If you want to create the logs on the well and not just display them in the track,
select the Export log check box. If you use this option, the extracted logs will
not be linked to the source data. (The extracted log will not update if the source
data is modified, and the source data will not update if the extracted log is
modified.)
• If you want to add the logs only to display them, not create them for the well,
clear the Export log check box. In this case, the extracted logs will be linked to
the source data. (The extracted log will update if the source data is modified, and
the source data will update if the extracted log is modified.) However, the
extracted logs will not be available outside the cross section view.

5-28 Visualizing Data in Geologic Cross Sections GOCAD® 2009.1 User Guide
 Part
III

Visualization
Notes
• If you select the Export Log option, the exported well log appears in the Object Tree
and in the Objects tab in the Logs list for the well. If you do not select the Export
Log option, the exported well log appears only in the in the Logs list for the well in
the Cross Section window from which it was exported (it does not appear in other
windows).
• The information in the Advanced area of the dialog box is used internally for
contextual information. We recommend that you do not change it.

5 Click OK to carry out the command and close the dialog box, or click Apply to carry
out the command and leave the dialog box open.
The external curves appear in the Objects tab, listed under the log track. If you exported
the curve to the well (by leaving the Export log check box selected), the curves also
appear in the Object Tree in the list of logs for the well. The naming convention for an
exported curve is PropertyName_of_ SourceObjectName. If you did not export the curve,
the naming convention is PropertyName(SourceObjectName ).

To add an external Adding an external log to an interval track is similar to adding one to a log track. The list
log to an interval of properties from which you can extract the log is narrowed, however, to discrete
track in a properties—for example, facies interpretations and simulated facies properties—that are
cross section view appropriate for display in an interval track.
1 From the Objects tab, right-click the interval track, and then click Add Interval Log
to open the Add Interval Log in Cross Section Track dialog box.
2 Complete step 2 through step 5 in "To add an external log to a cross section view"
on page 5-28.
The external log appears on the Objects tab, listed under the interval track. If you
exported the log to the well (by leaving the Export log check box selected), the log also
appears in the Object Tree in the list of logs for the well. The naming convention for an
exported log is PropertyName _of_ SourceObjectName. If you did not export the log, the
naming convention is PropertyName (SourceObjectName).

Rock & Fluid Canvas™ 2009 | Epos™ 4.0 5.6 Working with Logs in a Cross Section View 5-29
Paradigm™

5.7 Working with Well Markers in a Cross

Section View
When you create a Cross Section with wells, existing well markers automatically appear
on the Objects tab (under the pillar name and the well name). You can create and apply a
template to standardize the markers for all of the pillars, or you can work with the
markers on individual pillars.
You can work with markers on individual pillars in the Cross Section window the same
way that you do in the Log Display window. For example, to show or hide well markers
and control whether the name appears above the marker.
For more information about:
• How to work with markers on an individual pillar, see "Working with Well Markers in
Tracks" on page 3-55.
• Basic commands for well markers, such as how to create and add a marker to a
marker set, see Part IV: Foundation Modeling, "Creating and Editing Well Markers
and Marker Sets" on page 7-14.
• How to create and apply a pillar template, see "Creating and Working with Pillar
Templates" on page 3-61.

5-30 Visualizing Data in Geologic Cross Sections GOCAD® 2009.1 User Guide
 Part
III

Visualization
5.8 Displaying Features, Objects, and
Properties in a Cross Section View
In the Cross Section window, all of the objects that you can visualize in the cross section
view appear on the Objects tab.
If an object appears on the Objects tab, the object either:
• Intersects the cross section view.
– or –
• Is perpendicular to one or more of the cross section planes and lies within the
maximum projection distance. (The default projection distance is a calculation of the
cross section height divided by 500.)
Whether the object intersection or projection appears in the cross section view depends
on the object type. Table 5–1 lists the objects that you can display in a cross section view
and specifies whether an intersection or projection appears for each. You can also
visualize object properties in a cross section view. For wells, you can also display logs,
markers, completions, and regions along the projected well path.

Table 5–1 Objects that

you can display in a Eligible object type Display method
cross section view PointsSet projection
Curve projection
Surface intersection
ShotLine (from a 2D-Survey) projection
Voxet intersection
SGrid intersection
Well projection
2D Grid intersection
DEM 1 intersection

Dip 1 projection
Cross Section intersection

1. Requires the Advanced Structural Analysis

(Kine3D-1) module. For more information, see
Part VII: Geologic Interpretation, "Visualizing a
DEM on a Cross Section" on page 3-25, and
"Creating, Editing, and Visualizing Dips on a
Cross Section" on page 3-38.

Rock & Fluid Canvas™ 2009 | Epos™ 4.0 5.8 Displaying Features, Objects, and Properties in a Cross Section View 5-31
Paradigm™

For information about how to visualize objects in a cross section view, see:
• "Displaying Features in a Cross Section View," page 5-32
• "Showing or Hiding Objects in a Cross Section View," page 5-32
• "Accessing Display Settings for an Object in a Cross Section View," page 5-33
• "Accessing Display Settings for an Object Property in a Cross Section View,"
page 5-34
• "Displaying a Point Set in a Cross Section View," page 5-34
• "Displaying a Curve in a Cross Section View," page 5-36
• "Displaying a Surface in a Cross Section View," page 5-37
• "Filling a Structural Interpretation with Solid Painting," page 5-38
• "Displaying a ShotLine in a Cross Section View," page 5-39
• "Displaying a Voxet in a Cross Section View," page 5-39
• "Displaying a Stratigraphic Grid in a Cross Section View," page 5-41
• "Displaying a Projected Well and Data in a Cross Section View," page 5-43
• "Displaying a 2D Grid in a Cross Section View," page 5-49

5.8.1 Displaying Features in a Cross Section View

You can visualize features on a cross section view in the same way you visualize them in
the 3D Viewer. For information, see Part IV: Foundation Modeling:
• "What Are Features?" on page 8-2
• "Visualizing Features" on page 8-9

5.8.2 Showing or Hiding Objects in a Cross Section

View
You can show or hide objects in a cross section view from the Objects tab and from
shortcut commands that you can access by right-clicking items in the view. You can also
filter the list on the Objects tab so that you see only those objects you have displayed in
the cross section view.
Note If a cross section view is in the time domain, only objects in the time domain appear in the list
on the Objects tab. Likewise, if a cross section view is in the depth domain, only objects in the
depth domain appear in the list on the Objects tab.

For more information, see:

• "To show or hide objects," page 5-32
• "To filter the list on the Objects tab," page 5-33
• "To list all eligible objects on the Objects tab," page 5-33

To show or hide ♦ Do the following as necessary:

objects
• To show or hide all objects, right-click a blank area in the view, and then click
Show All or Hide All.
• To show or hide all objects of a particular type, on the Objects tab, right-click the
object category—for example, PointsSet or Curve— and then click Show All or
Hide All.

5-32 Visualizing Data in Geologic Cross Sections GOCAD® 2009.1 User Guide
 Part
III

Visualization
• To show or hide an individual object or eligible feature, on the Objects tab, select
or clear the check box next to its name.
• To show an object property, on the Objects tab, select the check box next to the
name of the object, and then select the check box next to the name of the
property.
Or, to hide the property, clear the check box next to the name of the property.
• To show a log on a projected well, on the Objects tab, select the check box next
to the name of the well, and then select the check box next to the name of the
log.
Or, to hide the log, clear the check box next to the name of the log.
• To show a marker on a projected well, on the Objects tab, select the check box
next to the name of the well, and then select the check box next to the name of
the marker.
Or, to hide the marker, clear the check box next to the name of the marker.

To filter the list on the ♦ Right-click a blank area of the Objects tab (for example, the area below the list), and
Objects tab then click View eligible objects.
Only objects that are currently displayed or were previously displayed in the cross section
view appear on the Objects tab.

To list all eligible If you filtered the Objects tab as described in the previous procedure, you can revert to
objects on the listing all eligible objects.
Objects tab
♦ Right-click a blank area of the on the Objects tab, and then click View eligible
objects again.
All objects eligible to be displayed in the cross section view appear on the Objects tab.

5.8.3 Accessing Display Settings for an Object in a

Cross Section View
You can use settings available in the Attribute toolbar and the Attributes dialog box to
change the appearance of any object you display on a cross section view. The settings are
similar to the ones available in GOCAD but include only those attributes applicable in a
2D view. The Attributes dialog box sometimes contains more advanced settings than the
ones available on the toolbar.
Changing an attribute viewable in 2D and 3D, such as the solid color of an object,
changes the attribute in the 3D Viewer and in other 2D windows. For more information,
see "What Is Synchronized Between 2D and 3D Views?" on page 1-12.
For information about how to open the Attribute toolbar and the Attributes dialog box
for a specific object on your Cross Section, see:
• "To access the Attribute toolbar for an object," page 5-33
• "To open Attributes for an object," page 5-34

To access the ♦ In a cross section view, select the name of the object on the Objects tab.
Attribute toolbar for
an object – or –

Rock & Fluid Canvas™ 2009 | Epos™ 4.0 5.8 Displaying Features, Objects, and Properties in a Cross Section View 5-33
Paradigm™

With the pointer in selection mode, click the object in the view.

Note To change the pointer to selection mode, click Select Objects on the Selection
toolbar.

The Attribute toolbar for the object appears at the bottom of the Cross Section
window.

To open Attributes ♦ In a cross section view, right-click the object on the Objects tab or in the view, and
for an object then click Attributes to open the dialog box.

5.8.4 Accessing Display Settings for an Object

Property in a Cross Section View
You can use tools on the Attribute toolbar to change the appearance of object properties
that you display on a cross section view. Most of the settings available on Attribute
toolbars in the Cross Section window are the same as the ones in the GOCAD window.
For properties in a Voxet object and for well logs, there are some settings specific to
displaying in a cross section view. For descriptions of these additional settings, see
"Displaying a Voxet in a Cross Section View" on page 5-39 and "Displaying a Projected
Well and Data in a Cross Section View" on page 5-43.
Note Changing the color map of the property in the Cross Section window affects the property's
appearance in the 3D Viewer and in other 2D views.

To access the ♦ In the Cross Section window, expand the object in the Objects tab, expand
Attribute toolbar for properties, and then select the name of the property.
an object in a
cross section view The Attribute toolbar for the property appears at the bottom of the Cross Section
window.

5.8.5 Displaying a Point Set in a Cross Section View

You can use the Attribute toolbar to change the color and size of nodes in a point set
that are projected onto a cross section view. You can also specify the symbol to represent
nodes that are in the cross section view (that is, nodes that intersect a cross section view
panel). By selecting additional options in the Attributes dialog box, you can specify
different symbols to represent nodes that are in front of or behind the panels.
Figure 5–6 shows an example of a point set in cross section view view with cross symbols
representing nodes that are in front of panels and point symbols representing nodes that
are behind panels. Compare with the 3D Viewer view on the right. In this example, none
of the nodes intersects the cross section view.

5-34 Visualizing Data in Geologic Cross Sections GOCAD® 2009.1 User Guide
 Part
III

Visualization
Figure 5–6 Using different node symbols for points on a cross section view

For more information, see:

• "Attribute toolbar for a point set in a cross section view," page 5-35
• "Attributes for a point set in a cross section view," page 5-36

Attribute toolbar for In a Cross Section window, when you select the name of a point set on the Objects tab,
a point set in a the Attribute toolbar for that point set is displayed at the bottom of the window.
cross section view

Color. Specifies the color of the selected point set. Click the button, and
then click the color.

Nodes Symbols. Specifies the symbol (for example, point, cross, square) to
represent nodes in the point set that intersect a cross section view panel.
Note You can use the Attribute dialog box to specify a different symbol for nodes
that are in front of a panel and for nodes that are behind a panel.

Nodes Symbols Size. Specifies the size in points of node symbols in the
selected point set.

Rock & Fluid Canvas™ 2009 | Epos™ 4.0 5.8 Displaying Features, Objects, and Properties in a Cross Section View 5-35
Paradigm™

Attributes for a point You can specify how you want a point set to appear on a cross section view by selecting
set in a cross section options for the color, size, and symbol in the Attributes dialog box. Figure 5–6 on
view page 5-35 shows an example. For information about how to open the dialog box, see
"Accessing Display Settings for an Object in a Cross Section View" on page 5-33.

Color. Specifies the color of the selected point set. Click the color button, and then click
the color.
Nodes symbols size. Specifies the size in points of node symbols in the selected point
set.
Nodes symbols (in the panel). Specifies the symbol (for example, point, cross, square)
to represent nodes in the point set that intersect the cross section view panel.
Nodes symbols (in front of the panel). Specifies the symbol (for example, point, cross,
square) to represent nodes in the point set that are in front of the cross section view
panel.
Nodes symbols (behind the panel). Specifies the symbol (for example, point, cross,
square) to represent nodes in the point set that are behind the cross section view panel.

5.8.6 Displaying a Curve in a Cross Section View

A Curve projected in a cross section view appears as a line with cross symbols at each
point. You can use the Attribute toolbar and the Attributes dialog box to change the
color, line width, and size of the node symbol.
For more information, see:
• "Attribute toolbar for a segmented line in a cross section view," page 5-37
• "Attributes for a segmented line in a cross section view," page 5-37

5-36 Visualizing Data in Geologic Cross Sections GOCAD® 2009.1 User Guide
 Part
III

Visualization
Attribute toolbar for In a Cross Section window, when you select the name of a segmented line on the
a segmented line in a Objects tab, the Attribute toolbar for that curve is displayed at the bottom of the
cross section view window.

Curve Color. Specifies the color of the selected segmented line. Click the
button, and then click the color.

Curve Width. Specifies the thickness in points of the selected segmented

line.

Symbol Size. Specifies the size in points of node symbols in the selected
segmented line.

Attributes for a You can specify how you want a segmented line to appear on a cross section view by
segmented line in a selecting options for the color, line width, and node symbol size in the Attributes dialog
cross section view box. For information about how to open the dialog box, see "Accessing Display Settings
for an Object in a Cross Section View" on page 5-33.

Color. Specifies the color of the selected segmented line. Click the color button, and then
click the color.
Curve width. Specifies the thickness in points of the selected segmented line.
Symbol size. Specifies the size in points of node symbols in the selected segmented line.

5.8.7 Displaying a Surface in a Cross Section View

When you display a surface on a cross section view, a line represents the intersection of
the surface and the cross section view. You can use the Attribute toolbar and the
Attributes dialog box to change the color of the surface and the width of the
intersection line.
For more information, see:
• "Attribute toolbar for a surface in a cross section view," page 5-38
• "Attributes for a surface in a cross section view," page 5-38
Note You can also fill intervals between horizon surfaces in a structural interpretation. For more
information, see "Filling a Structural Interpretation with Solid Painting," page 5-38.

Rock & Fluid Canvas™ 2009 | Epos™ 4.0 5.8 Displaying Features, Objects, and Properties in a Cross Section View 5-37
Paradigm™

Attribute toolbar for In a Cross Section window, when you select the name of a surface on the Objects tab,
a surface in a the Attribute toolbar for that surface is displayed at the bottom of the window.
cross section view

Surface Color. Specifies the color of the selected surface. Click the
button, and then click the color.

Line Width. Specifies the thickness in points of the line representing the
surface in the cross section view.

Attributes for a You can specify how you want a surface to appear on a cross section by selecting options
surface in a for the color and line width in the Attributes dialog box. For information about how to
cross section view open the dialog box, see "Accessing Display Settings for an Object in a Cross Section
View" on page 5-33.

Color. Specifies the color of the selected surface. Click the color button, and then click
the color.
Line width. Specifies the thickness in points of the line representing the surface in a
cross section view.

5.8.8 Filling a Structural Interpretation with Solid

Painting
You can use Solid Painting to fill intervals between surfaces displayed in a
cross section view. If the top surface is not an unconformity, the command uses the color
of the top surface to fill the interval. If the top surface is an unconformity, an algorithm
computes the stratigraphic unit below the horizon, and the command uses the color of
that stratigraphic unit.
Note To create a display that is consistent with your structural interpretation (for example, a
structural model built with the GOCAD Structural Framework Builder or SKUA Structure and
Stratigraphy Workflow), be sure to display all the horizons and faults in the model.

To fill an 1 Display all of the horizons, faults, and gridded surfaces (2D Grid objects) that are in
interpretation with your structural model in the cross section view.
solid painting
2 On the Cross Section toolbar, click Solid Painting .

5-38 Visualizing Data in Geologic Cross Sections GOCAD® 2009.1 User Guide
 Part
III

Visualization
3 To change the transparency of the solid fill, enter a number between 0 and 1 in the
Solid Transparency box to the right of , where 0 is completely transparent and
1 is completely opaque.
This command fills the interval between the displayed surfaces or 2D grids with the color
of the top surface or 2D grid for each interval, or, if the top surface is an unconformity,
with the color of the stratigraphic unit below the horizon.
Note If a gap exists between the surfaces that define the interval you are attempting to fill, the fill
will extend beyond the intended interval (even if the gap is extremely small).

5.8.9 Displaying a ShotLine in a Cross Section View

In a cross section view, you can display a ShotLine object (from a 2D-Survey) and access
attributes for shotlines.

To display a shotline ♦ In a cross section view, on the Objects tab, expand the ShotLine category, and then
in a cross section select the check box next to the name of the shotline.
view
Or, to show or hide all shotlines that can be displayed in the active view, right-click
the ShotLine category, and then click Show All or Hide All.

5.8.10 Displaying a Voxet in a Cross Section View

When you display a voxet in a cross section view, the voxet cage and the first voxet
property in the list appear in the view. You can use the Attribute toolbar and the
Attributes dialog box to change the appearance of the cage.
The Attribute toolbar for a voxet property is similar to the one in the GOCAD window
but with the addition of tools for visualizing the property as seismic wiggles and
smoothing the property.
Note If you created the cross section view from a voxet as described in "Creating a Cross Section
from a Voxet Section or Probe" on page 5-13, the Seismic Section toolbar is available. You can use
settings on this toolbar to navigate through the voxet sections.

For more information, see:

• "Attribute toolbar for a voxet in a cross section view," page 5-40
• "Attributes for a voxet in a cross section view," page 5-40
• "Attribute toolbar for a voxet property in a cross section view," page 5-41

Rock & Fluid Canvas™ 2009 | Epos™ 4.0 5.8 Displaying Features, Objects, and Properties in a Cross Section View 5-39
Paradigm™

Attribute toolbar for In a Cross Section window, when you select the name of a voxet in the Objects tab, the
a voxet in a Attribute toolbar for that voxet is displayed at the bottom of the window.
cross section view

Voxet Cage. Displays the cage (boundary) of the selected voxet.

Voxet Cage Color. Specifies the color of the voxet cage. Click the button,
and then click the color.

Voxet Cage Width. Specifies the thickness in points of the voxet cage.

Attributes for a voxet You can specify how you want the voxet cage to appear in a cross section view by
in a cross section selecting options in the Attributes dialog box. For information about how to open the
view dialog box, see "Accessing Display Settings for an Object in a Cross Section View" on
page 5-33.

Cage
Visible. Displays the cage (boundary) of the selected voxet. To specify the cage color,
click the color button, and then click the color.
Width. Specifies the thickness in points of the voxet cage.

5-40 Visualizing Data in Geologic Cross Sections GOCAD® 2009.1 User Guide
 Part
III

Visualization
Attribute toolbar for In a cross section view, when you select the name of a voxet property on the Objects tab,
a voxet property in a the Attribute toolbar for that property is displayed at the bottom of the window. The
cross section view two tools on the left are specific to cross section views.

Smooth. Removes jagged edges in the property display. This setting has no affect if
you visualize the property as wiggle traces.

Display Type. Displays the selected voxet property as wiggle traces instead of a
density plot. When you click the arrow, you can select from the following display
types: Density, Wiggles, Density and Wiggles, Monochrome Wiggles, Color
Wiggles, and Lobe Wiggles. Figure 5–7 shows an example of each display type.

Figure 5–7 Display types

for voxet properties
Density Monochrome
Wiggles

Wiggles Color
Wiggles

Density Lobe
and Wiggles
Wiggles

Note The examples are shown with the Smooth option.

5.8.11 Displaying a Stratigraphic Grid in a Cross

Section View
You can use the Attribute toolbar and the Attributes dialog box to change the
appearance of a stratigraphic grid (SGrid) in a cross section view. You can show or hide
the solid fill and the grid, and you can change their colors.
For more information, see:
• "Attribute toolbar for an SGrid in a cross section view," page 5-42
• "Attributes for an SGrid in a cross section view," page 5-42

Rock & Fluid Canvas™ 2009 | Epos™ 4.0 5.8 Displaying Features, Objects, and Properties in a Cross Section View 5-41
Paradigm™

Attribute toolbar for In a cross section view, when you select the name of an SGrid object on the Objects tab,
an SGrid in a the Attribute toolbar for that grid appears at the bottom of the window.
cross section view

SGrid Solid. Displays the solid fill within the boundaries of the SGrid object.

SGrid Solid Color. Specifies the color of the solid fill. Click , and then click the
color.

Grid. Displays the grid mesh.

Grid Color. Specifies the color of the grid mesh. Click , and then click the
color.

Attributes for an You can specify how you want an SGrid object to appear in a cross section view by
SGrid in a selecting options in the Attributes dialog box. You can display the solid fill and the grid,
cross section view and you can change their colors. For information about how to access the attributes, see
"Accessing Display Settings for an Object in a Cross Section View" on page 5-33.

Solid
Visible. Displays the SGrid solid fill. To specify the fill color, click the color button,
and then click the color.
Grid
Visible. Displays the grid. To specify the grid color, click the color button, and then
click the color.

5-42 Visualizing Data in Geologic Cross Sections GOCAD® 2009.1 User Guide
 Part
III

Visualization
5.8.12 Displaying a Projected Well and Data in a
Cross Section View
When you display a well in a cross section view, the line representing the projected well
path is solid if the path is in front of the panel and dashed if the path is behind the panel.
You can visualize the well path and the completions, logs, markers, and regions along the
well path as follows:
• Well path. You can use the Attribute toolbar for the well to change the color and
width of the well path and to visualize the intersection point between the well path
and the cross section. The Attributes dialog box offers an additional setting to
specify the width of well markers.
• Completions. You can use the Attribute toolbar for well completions to specify the
color, position (left or right side of the well path), and thickness of the line
representing the completions. You can also use the toolbar to specify the amount of
space you want between the completions and the well path and to fill the space with
a specified color.
• Log. You can use the Attribute toolbar for a log to specify the color, position (left or
right side of the well path), and size of the log curve. You can also use the toolbar to
fill or flip the log curve and change the transparency of the curve fill. By using
additional settings in the Attributes dialog box, you can change the thickness of the
log curve, display the log name, and specify the color and position of the log name.
• Marker. You can use the Attribute toolbar for a marker to specify its width and size
(length) and to display the marker name. In the Attributes dialog box, you can also
change the color of the marker name. The attributes you specify for one marker
affect all the markers on that well.
• Region. You can use the Attribute toolbar for a region to specify the color, position
(left or right side of the well path), and thickness of the line representing the region.
You can also use the toolbar to specify the amount of space you want between the
region and the well path and to fill the space with a specified color.
Figure 5–8 shows the result of displaying a well, log, marker, and intersection point in a
cross section view.

Rock & Fluid Canvas™ 2009 | Epos™ 4.0 5.8 Displaying Features, Objects, and Properties in a Cross Section View 5-43
Paradigm™

Figure 5–8 Well displayed

in cross section

Well path in front

of panel

Well log

Intersection point

Marker and
name

Well path behind

panel

Note Logs displayed on projected wells represent measured depth (MD) rather than true vertical
depth subsea (TVDSS) values, which can be used when logs are displayed in cross section tracks.
Depth values for markers are also in measured depth.

After you set up one well to look the way you want, you can copy the attributes to the
other wells.
For more information, see:
• "Attribute toolbar for a well in a cross section view," page 5-44
• "Attributes for a well in a cross section view," page 5-45
• "Attribute toolbar for well completions in a cross section view," page 5-45
• "Attribute toolbar for a log in a cross section view," page 5-46
• "Attributes for a log in a cross section view," page 5-47
• "Attribute toolbar for a marker in a cross section view," page 5-48
• "Attributes for a marker in a cross section view," page 5-48
• "Attribute toolbar for a well region in a cross section view," page 5-48
• "About copying attributes to all projected wells," page 5-49
• "To copy attributes to other projected wells," page 5-49

Attribute toolbar for In a cross section view, when you select the name of a well in the Objects tab, the
a well in a Attribute toolbar for that well is displayed at the bottom of the window.
cross section view

Well Path Color. Specifies the color of the well path. Click , and then
click the color.

Well Path Width. Specifies the thickness of the well path in points.

Intersection Point. Displays a point at the location where the well path
intersects the cross section view.

Intersection Point Size. Specifies the size in points of the intersection

point.

5-44 Visualizing Data in Geologic Cross Sections GOCAD® 2009.1 User Guide
 Part
III

Visualization
Attributes for a well You can select options in the Attributes dialog box to control the color and width of the
in a cross section well path and the thickness of well markers displayed on the path. You can also visualize
view the intersection point between the well path and the cross section view. For information
about how to access the attributes, see "Accessing Display Settings for an Object in a
Cross Section View" on page 5-33.

Path
Color. Specifies the color of the well path. Click the color button, and then click the
color.
Width. Specifies thickness of the well path in points.
Markers
Width. Specifies the thickness of well markers in points.
Intersection
Visible. Displays a point at the location where the well path intersects the
cross section view. To specify the color of the intersection point, click the color
button, and then click the color.
Size. Move the slider to change the size in points of the intersection point.

Attribute toolbar for In a cross section view, when you select Completions in the Objects tab, the Attribute
well completions in a toolbar for well completions is displayed at the bottom of the window.
cross section view

Completions Color. Specifies the color of the line that represents the well
completions. Click , and then click the color.

Line Width. Specifies the thickness (in points) of the line that represents
the well completions.

Rock & Fluid Canvas™ 2009 | Epos™ 4.0 5.8 Displaying Features, Objects, and Properties in a Cross Section View 5-45
Paradigm™

left. Displays the completions on the left side of the well path.

right. Displays the completions on the right side of the well path.

Size. Specifies the size of the space between the completions and the well
path. Zero means to display the completions on the path.

Fill. Fills the space between the completions and the well path with the
specified color. To change the color, click the arrow next to the button,
and then click the color.

Attribute toolbar for In a cross section view, when you select the name of a well log in the Objects tab, the
a log in a Attribute toolbar for that well log is displayed at the bottom of the window.
cross section view

Log Curve Color. Specifies the color of the log curve. Click , and then click
the color.

left. Displays the selected log curve on the left side of the well path.

right. Displays the selected log curve on the right side of the well path.

Size. Specifies the width of the space used to display the log curve along the
well path.

Fill. Fills the log curve with the specified color. To change the color, click the
arrow next to the button, and then click the color.

Fill Transparency. Specifies the transparency of the curve fill. To change the
transparency, enter a number between 0 and 1, where 0 is completely opaque
and 1 is completely transparent.

Flip. Reverses the left and right log scales, creating a mirror image of the log
curve.

5-46 Visualizing Data in Geologic Cross Sections GOCAD® 2009.1 User Guide
 Part
III

Visualization
Attributes for a log in You can select options in the Attributes dialog box to control the display and appearance
a cross section view of the well log—for example, the color of the log curve, the side of the well path on
which the log curve is displayed, and the size of the log curve. You can also flip the log,
fill it, and display the name.
Tip To open the dialog box,
expand the name of the well
on the Objects tab, expand
logs, right-click the name of
the log, and then click
Attributes.

Log curve
Visible. Displays the selected log curve. To specify the color of the curve, click the
color button, and then click the color.
Position. Places the log curve on the left or right side of the well path.
Width. Specifies the thickness in points of the selected log curve.
Size. Move the slider to change the size of the space used to display the log curve
along the well path.
Fill. Fills the log curve with the specified color. Click the color button, and then click
the color.
Transparency. Specifies the transparency of the curve fill. To change the
transparency, enter a number between 0 and 1, where 0 is completely opaque and 1
is completely transparent.
Flip. Reverses the left and right log scales, creating a mirror image of the log curve.
Name
Visible. Displays the name of the log curve. To specify the color of the name, click the
color button, and then click the color.
Anchor MD. Specifies the measured depth at which to position the log curve name.

Rock & Fluid Canvas™ 2009 | Epos™ 4.0 5.8 Displaying Features, Objects, and Properties in a Cross Section View 5-47
Paradigm™

Attribute toolbar for In a cross section view, when you select the name of a well marker in the Objects tab, the
a marker in a Attribute toolbar for that well marker is displayed at the bottom of the window.
cross section view

Width. Specifies the thickness in points of the selected well marker.

Size. Specifies the length of the well marker.

Marker Name. Displays the marker name to the right of the well marker.

Attributes for a You can select options in the Attributes dialog box to control the display and appearance
marker in a of the well marker and label.
cross section view
Tip To open the dialog box,
expand the name of the well
on the Objects tab, expand
markers, right-click the
name of the marker, and
then click Attributes.

Marker
Visible. Displays the selected well marker.
Width. Specifies the thickness of the well marker in points.
Size. Specifies the length of the well marker.
Name
Visible. Displays the name of the well marker. To specify the color of the name, click
the color button, and then click the color.

Attribute toolbar for In a cross section view, when you select the name of a region on the Objects tab, the
a well region in a Attribute toolbar for that well region is displayed at the bottom of the window.
cross section view

Region Color. Specifies the color of the line that represents the well
region. Click the button, and then click the color.

Line Width. Specifies the thickness (in points) of the line that represents
the well region.

5-48 Visualizing Data in Geologic Cross Sections GOCAD® 2009.1 User Guide
 Part
III

Visualization
Left. Displays the region on the left side of the well path.

Right. Displays the region on the right side of the well path.

Size. Specifies the size of the space between the region and the well path.
Zero means to display the region on the path.

Fill. Fills the space between the region and the well path with the
specified color. To change the color, click the arrow next to the button,
and then click the color.

Region Label. Show or hide the name of the well region in the view.

About copying After you change the attributes for one well—including its completions, logs, markers,
attributes to all and regions—you can copy the attributes to all the other wells in your cross section. For
projected wells information, see "To copy attributes to other projected wells" on page 5-49.
Important One attribute that the command does not copy to the other wells is the
log color.
The command also shows the same information on the wells that you copy the attributes
to. For example, any logs and markers that you display on the original well are also
displayed on the other wells after you apply the command (assuming the same logs and
markers exist on the other wells).
If you change the appearance of the original well, you must copy the attributes to the
other wells again if you want them to have the same appearance.

To copy attributes to ♦ In a cross section view, on the Objects tab, right-click the name of the well with the
other projected wells attributes that you want to copy, and then click Copy Attributes to All Wells.
All wells projected in the cross section view have the same appearance, and the same
information is displayed on all the wells. For more information about this command, see
"About copying attributes to all projected wells" on page 5-49.

5.8.13 Displaying a 2D Grid in a Cross Section View

When you display a 2D Grid object (a gridded surface) in a cross section view, a line
represents the intersection of the gridded surface and the cross section view. You can use
the Attribute toolbar and the Attributes dialog box to change the color of the gridded
surface and the width of the intersection line.
For more information, see:
• "Attribute toolbar for a gridded surface in a cross section view," page 5-50
• "Attributes dialog box for a gridded surface in a cross section view," page 5-50
• "To set project a well along the strike and dip," page 5-50

Rock & Fluid Canvas™ 2009 | Epos™ 4.0 5.8 Displaying Features, Objects, and Properties in a Cross Section View 5-49
Paradigm™

Attribute toolbar for In a cross section view, when you select the name of a 2D Grid object in the Objects tab,
a gridded surface in a the Attribute toolbar for that gridded surface is displayed at the bottom of the window.
cross section view

2D Grid Color. Specifies the color of the selected gridded surface. Click
the button, and then click the color.

Line Width. Specifies the thickness in points of the line representing the
gridded surface in the cross section view.

Attributes dialog box You can specify how you want a gridded surface (2D Grid object) to appear in a
for a gridded surface cross section view by selecting options for the color and line width in the Attributes
in a cross section dialog box. For information about how to access these settings, see "Accessing Display
view Settings for an Object in a Cross Section View" on page 5-33.

Color. Specifies the color of the selected 2D grid. Click the color button, and then click
the color.
Line width. Specifies the thickness in points of the line representing the 2D grid in the
cross section view.

To set project a well ♦ In a cross section view, on the Objects tab, right-click the name of the well for which
along the strike and you want to set the projection method, and then click Project Along Dip.
dip
Note Wells are projected orthogonally to the cross section.

5-50 Visualizing Data in Geologic Cross Sections GOCAD® 2009.1 User Guide
 Part
III

Visualization
5.9 Displaying Cross Sections in the
3D Viewer
In addition to creating a 2D view of a cross section, you can also visualize the 2D view in
the 3D Viewer. It can be difficult to understand a 2D view because its shape may be
complex in 3D. Displaying a cross section in the 3D Viewer can help you reconcile the 2D
and 3D views. When you display a cross section in the 3D Viewer, you can also display the
projection of other objects onto it. Figure 5–9 shows an example of a cross section
displayed in the Cross Section window and the 3D Viewer.
You can use settings available in the Attribute toolbar and the Attributes dialog box to
change the appearance of cross sections you display in the 3D Viewer and, in some cases,
of objects you display on a cross section in the 3D Viewer. You can also use the
Attributes dialog box to view information about a cross section you display in the
3D Viewer, including values for the cross sections’s top, bottom, and length, expressed in
the unit of measure of the project, as well as the number of pillars on the cross section.

Figure 5–9 Comparison of a cross section displayed in the Cross Section window and the 3D Viewer

The cross section on the left is displayed in the Cross Section window. The cross section on the right is the
same cross section displayed in the 3D Viewer. The same wells are displayed in both views.

For more information, see:

• "Showing or Hiding Cross Sections in the 3D Viewer," page 5-52
• "Accessing Display Settings for Cross Sections in the 3D Viewer," page 5-52
• "Visualizing a Cross Section in the 3D Viewer," page 5-52
• "Viewing Information about a Cross Section in the 3D Viewer," page 5-54
• "Showing or Hiding Objects on a Cross Section in the 3D Viewer," page 5-54
• "Accessing Display Settings for Objects Displayed on a Cross Section
in the 3D Viewer," page 5-55

Rock & Fluid Canvas™ 2009 | Epos™ 4.0 5.9 Displaying Cross Sections in the 3D Viewer 5-51
Paradigm™

5.9.1 Showing or Hiding Cross Sections in the

3D Viewer
♦ Do either of the following:

• To show or hide all cross sections, in the Object Tree, right-click Cross Section,
and then click Show All or Hide All.
• To show or hide an individual cross section, in the Object Tree, expand Cross
Section, and then select or clear the check box next to the name of the cross
section.

5.9.2 Accessing Display Settings for Cross Sections

in the 3D Viewer
You can use settings available in the Attribute toolbar and the Attributes dialog box to
change the appearance cross sections you display in the 3D Viewer. The settings are
similar to the ones for other objects you display in the 3D Viewer.
For more information, see:
• "To open the Attribute toolbar for cross sections in the 3D Viewer," page 5-52
• "To open the Attributes dialog box for cross sections in the 3D Viewer," page 5-52

To open the Attribute ♦ To access display settings for an individual cross section, in the Object Tree, expand
toolbar for cross Cross Section, and then select the name of the cross section. The Attribute toolbar
sections in the for the selected cross section appears at the bottom of the GOCAD window.
3D Viewer
Note To access display settings that apply to all cross sections, use the Attributes dialog box
(see "To open the Attributes dialog box for cross sections in the 3D Viewer" on page 5-52).

To open the ♦ Do either of the following:

Attributes dialog box
for cross sections in • To access display settings that apply to all cross sections, in the Object Tree, right-
the 3D Viewer click Cross Section, and then click Attributes to open the dialog box.
• To access display settings for an individual cross section, in the Object Tree,
expand Cross Section, right-click the name of the cross section, and then click
Attributes to open the dialog box.

5.9.3 Visualizing a Cross Section in the 3D Viewer

When you display a cross section in the 3D Viewer, you can use the Attributes dialog box
to show its bounding box and clipping domain (the area within which objects will be
displayed on the map), as well as the solid fill of the panels. Additionally, you can specify
the color and transparency of the solid fill of the panels, as well as the line colors of the
bounding box and clipping domain. By selecting additional options in the Attributes
toolbar, you can display the cross section’s name and specify the color of the name.
For more information, see:
• "Attribute toolbar for a cross section in the 3D Viewer," page 5-53
• "Attributes dialog box for a cross section in the 3D Viewer," page 5-53

5-52 Visualizing Data in Geologic Cross Sections GOCAD® 2009.1 User Guide
 Part
III

Visualization
Attribute toolbar for When you select the name of a cross section in the Object Tree, the Attribute toolbar for
a cross section in the that cross section is displayed at the bottom of the GOCAD window. A description of
3D Viewer each button in the toolbar follows.

Bounding Box. Displays the outline of a box surrounding the selected cross
section in the 3D Viewer. The box indicates the extents of the cross section.
The color strip across the bottom of the button shows the color of the box.
Click the arrow next to the button, and then click the color.

Name. Displays the name of the selected cross section in the 3D Viewer.
The color strip across the bottom of the button shows the color of the text.
Click the arrow next to the button, and then click the color.

Attributes dialog box When you display a cross section in the 3D Viewer, you can use the Graphic tab of the
for a cross section in Attributes dialog box to show the cross section’s bounding box and clipping domain, as
the 3D Viewer well as the solid fill of the panels. You can also use it to change the color of the cross
section’s bounding box, clipping domain, and solid fill and to specify the transparency of
the solid fill. For information about how to open the dialog box, see "To open the
Attributes dialog box for cross sections in the 3D Viewer" on page 5-52.
Graphic tab

Bounding box
Visible. Displays an outline of a box surrounding the selected object. The box
indicates the extents of the object. To specify the color, click the color button,
and then click the color.
Clipping domain
Visible. Displays the cross section’s clipping domain, that is, the maximum datum
projection distance, or the area within which objects will be displayed on the
cross section. (Objects outside the clipping domain will not be displayed on the
cross section.) To specify the color, click the color button, and then click the color.
Note For information about the Info tab of the Attributes cross section name dialog box, see
"Viewing Information about a Cross Section in the 3D Viewer" on page 5-54.

Rock & Fluid Canvas™ 2009 | Epos™ 4.0 5.9 Displaying Cross Sections in the 3D Viewer 5-53
Paradigm™

5.9.4 Viewing Information about a Cross Section in

the 3D Viewer
To view values for the cross sections’s top, bottom, and length, expressed in the units of
measure you selected for the project, as well as the number of pillars on the cross section,
do this:
1 In the Object Tree, right-click the name of the cross section, and then click Attributes
to open the dialog box.
2 Click the Info tab. Information about the top, bottom, and length of the cross section
is displayed, along with the number of pillars in the cross section. Values for the top,
bottom, and length are expressed in the units of measure of the project.

Note For information about the Graphic tab of the Attributes cross section name dialog box, see
"Attributes dialog box for a cross section in the 3D Viewer" on page 5-53.

5.9.5 Showing or Hiding Objects on a Cross Section

in the 3D Viewer

To show or hide ♦ In the Object Tree, expand Cross Section, expand the name of the cross section on
objects on a cross which you want to show or hide objects, and then do one of the following:
section in the
3D Viewer Note When an object is shown on a cross section in the 3D Viewer, its projection along the
cross section, not the actual 3D object, is displayed.

• To show or hide all objects of a particular type, right-click the object type—for
example, Well or Curve—and then click Show All or Hide All.
• To show or hide an individual object, expand the object type—for example, Well
or Curve—and then select or clear the check box next to the name of the object
or objects.

5-54 Visualizing Data in Geologic Cross Sections GOCAD® 2009.1 User Guide
 Part
III

Visualization
5.9.6 Accessing Display Settings for Objects
Displayed on a Cross Section in the 3D Viewer
You can use settings available in the Attribute toolbar to change the appearance of some
of the objects that you can display on a cross section in the 3D Viewer. Objects for which
these toolbars are available include 2D-Grids, Curves, pillars, SGrids, Surfaces, and Wells.
The Attributes toolbars for these objects are similar to the ones for the corresponding
objects in the Log Display window (see "Displaying Features, Objects, and Properties in a
Cross Section View" on page 5-31).
In some cases, changing the attributes of an object you display on a cross section in the
3D Viewer, such as the object’s solid color, also changes the aLog Display window.
Similarly, in some cases, changing the attribute in the Log Display window also changes
the attribute in the 3D Viewer. For more information about how changes to an object’s
attributes are synchronized between the 3D Viewer and the 2D windows, see "What Is
Synchronized Between 2D and 3D Views?" on page 1-12.

To open the Attribute ♦ In the Object Tree, expand Cross Section, expand the name of the cross section on
toolbar for an object which you want to display objects, expand the object type—for example, Well or
on a cross section Curve—and then select the name of the object. The Attribute toolbar for the object
displayed in the appears at the bottom of the GOCAD window.
3D Viewer

Rock & Fluid Canvas™ 2009 | Epos™ 4.0 5.9 Displaying Cross Sections in the 3D Viewer 5-55
Paradigm™

5.10 Changing Layout and View Settings in a

Cross Section View
For information, see:
• "Changing the Layout in a Cross Section View," page 5-56
• "Changing the Main Axes in a Cross Section View," page 5-58
• "Editing View Settings in a Cross Section View," page 5-58
• "Locking the Aspect Ratio in a Cross Section View," page 5-61

5.10.1 Changing the Layout in a Cross Section View

You can customize the layout of the cross section and pillar headers. Figure 5–10 shows
an example.

Figure 5–10 Cross section header and pillar header

Cross
section
header
Pillar header

For information, see:

• "To show or hide the cross section header," page 5-56
• "To change the appearance of the cross section header," page 5-56
• "To change the appearance of the pillar headers," page 5-57

To show or hide the

cross section header ♦ On the Cross Section toolbar, click Header Visible .
– or –
1 Right-click the pillar header area in the view, and then click Attributes to open the
dialog box.
2 On the Layout tab, select or clear the Visible check box under Headers and labels.
3 Click OK to carry out the command and close the dialog box, or click Apply to carry
out the command and leave the dialog box open.
For an illustration of a cross section header, see Figure 5–10 on page 5-56.

To change the By using the Attributes dialog box, you can change the text, font, size, and color of the
appearance of the title information in the header. Figure 5–11 shows an example with the elements of the
cross section header title labeled.

Figure 5–11 Elements in

the cross section title Extremity label
Extremity orientation
Cross section title
1 Right-click the pillar header area in a cross section, and then click Attributes to open
the dialog box.
2 On the Layout tab, do any of the following in the Title area:

5-56 Visualizing Data in Geologic Cross Sections GOCAD® 2009.1 User Guide
 Part
III

Visualization
• To show any of the elements, select the Visible check box for that element.
• To hide any of the elements, clear the Visible check box for that element.

• To change the text for the element, type it in the box next to the Visible check
box.
• To change the appearance of the text, select the font, size, and color you want.
3 Click OK to carry out the command and close the dialog box, or click Apply to carry
out the command and leave the dialog box open.

To change the By using the Attributes dialog box, you can show or hide the well name and the well
appearance of the status above each pillar and change the appearance of the text.
pillar headers 1 Right-click the pillar header area in the cross section, and then click Attributes to
open the dialog box.
2 On the Layout tab, do any of the following in the Pillar header area:

3 Do any of the following to control the appearance of the row:

Tip If the well status is • To change the appearance of the text, select the font, size, and color you want.
unassigned or is not
specified correctly, you can
• To show or hide the well name, select or clear the Visible check box.
change it by opening the • To show or hide the well status, select or clear the Visible check box.
Well menu bar, pointing to
Edit, clicking Check Well
4 Click OK to carry out the command and close the dialog box, or click Apply to carry
Status, and then out the command and leave the dialog box open.
completing the dialog box.

Rock & Fluid Canvas™ 2009 | Epos™ 4.0 5.10 Changing Layout and View Settings in a Cross Section View 5-57
Paradigm™

5.10.2 Changing the Main Axes in a Cross Section

View
You can use the Cross Section toolbar or the Attributes dialog box to change the color
of the main horizontal axes that display on the top of the cross section and the vertical
axes that display on both sides.

To change the main

axes color
♦ On the Cross Section toolbar, click Main Axes Color , and then click the color.

– or –
1 Right-click the header area in the cross section, and then click Attributes to open the
dialog box.
2 Click the Axes tab, click the color button next to Main axes ticks, and then click the
color.
3 Click OK to carry out the command and close the dialog box, or click Apply to carry
out the command and leave the dialog box open.

5.10.3 Editing View Settings in a Cross Section View

You can change the height of the cross section, the maximum projection distance, and
the scale by using View Settings on the View toolbar. Most of the settings are the
same as those on the Create Cross Section from Picks and Wells dialog box. You can
also use to check the total size of the cross section before you print it.

To view the total size

1 In a cross section view, click View Settings on the View toolbar to open the
of the cross section or
dialog box.
fit it to a page

2 To specify all settings except Section paper size and Fit to page in the Cross
section panels scale and paper size area, see "To create a cross section view from
picks and wells" on page 5-7.

5-58 Visualizing Data in Geologic Cross Sections GOCAD® 2009.1 User Guide
 Part
III

Visualization
3 To scale the cross section data to fit a specific paper size by changing the Section
paper size or Fit to page settings, expand the Cross section panels scale and
paper size area, and then do either of the following:

• In the Section paper size boxes, type the approximate width and height of the
paper that you want the cross section to fit.
Important The section paper size controls the size of the cross section data
only and does not account for the margin around the cross section, title,
axes, tracks, track headers, property colorbars, or the legend that you might
add to the view. Unlike the section paper size, the total paper size accounts
not only for the data but also for the other elements in the view.
• Select the Fit to page check box, and then do one of the following:

• If you want to specify a predefined paper size (A4, Letter, Legal, and so on),
select it in the box on the right.
• If you want to define a custom page size, select Other in the box on the
right, and then type the width and height of the paper in the boxes below.
When you change the paper size, the information in the Horizontal & vertical
scale boxes updates automatically. The orientation of the printed page is
assumed to be portrait.
4 Click OK to carry out the command and close the dialog box, or click Apply to carry
out the command and leave the dialog box open.
Figure 5–12 illustrates the total width and height on a cross section with the legend
positioned on the right. The figure on the top shows the width with all pillars hidden;
the one on the bottom shows the affect with a track displayed on one pillar.

Rock & Fluid Canvas™ 2009 | Epos™ 4.0 5.10 Changing Layout and View Settings in a Cross Section View 5-59
Paradigm™

Figure 5–12 Total size for a cross section with and without tracks

Title
Title
WellA WellB Pillar and log
headers

Legend

Axis Axis Plot

height
Data area with pillars hidden

Plot width

Title
Title
WellA WellB Pillar and log
headers

Legend

Axis Axis Plot

Data area height

Plot width

5-60 Visualizing Data in Geologic Cross Sections GOCAD® 2009.1 User Guide
 Part
III

Visualization
5.10.4 Locking the Aspect Ratio in a Cross Section
View
In a cross section view, you can use Lock Aspect Ratio on the Options toolbar to
keep the aspect ratio constant. This tool is turned on by default. The aspect ratio is the
ratio of the horizontal dimension to the vertical dimension, x:y. If Lock Aspect Ratio is
turned off, when you change the cross section view by using Fit to View or Box

Zoom (View toolbar), vertical or horizontal stretching can occur. However, by

ensuring that Lock Aspect Ratio is turned on before clicking or , you ensure
that you maintain a constant aspect ratio and, therefore, that no vertical or horizontal
stretching occurs. When Lock Aspect Ratio is turned on, the and tools

maintain the original aspect ratio of the cross section in scaling the data. The tool fits
the cross section view to the window by scaling the horizontal and vertical data
proportionally until the window is filled in either the horizontal or vertical dimension.
For more information about the Fit to View and Box Zoom tools, see "Setting the
Display in 2D Windows" on page 1-8.

Note The aspect ratio of a cross section view does not change when you use Zoom In or

Zoom Out (View toolbar).

To turn Lock Aspect

Ratio on or off
♦ On the Options toolbar, click Lock Aspect Ratio .

Rock & Fluid Canvas™ 2009 | Epos™ 4.0 5.10 Changing Layout and View Settings in a Cross Section View 5-61
Paradigm™

5-62 Visualizing Data in Geologic Cross Sections GOCAD® 2009.1 User Guide
Index

Numerics Attributes dialog box Cross Section menu

cross section bar 5-2
2D distance 1-29
object on 5-33 Cross Section Set toolbar
2D window
map Cross Section
opening new 1-11
window 5-4
3D distance 1-29 object on 4-20
Cross Section
3D Viewer toolbar 5-3
displaying objects 2-2 C Cross Section window
getting started 2-2 camera overview 5-2
opening another 2-4 displaying objects 2-2 quick tour 5-2
panning 2-2 getting started 2-2 cross sections
rotating 2-2 panning view 2-2 changing display of
second screen 2-4 rotating the view 2-2 object properties
seeing an object’s on 5-34
zooming view 2-2
name 2-2 changing display of
chronostratigraphy
zooming 2-2 objects on 5-33
tracks 3-5
copying 1-15
color maps 2-5
creating 5-7
A Colormap Editor 2-6
creating a series 5-15
Attribute toolbar correlation tracks 3-5
creating along
cross section Create Log Display
horizontal
panel 3-8
object on 5-33 well 5-21
Create Section Along
object property creating from voxet
Horizontal Well
on 5-34 section 5-13
command 5-21
Cross Section Cross Section
creating cross section
window 5-3 window 5-2
from picks and
Log Display wells 5-7 Digitize and Display
window 3-3 command 5-12
cross section
map digitizing 5-12
introduction 1-2
object on 4-20 filling structural
measuring
object property interpretation 5-38
distance 1-29
on 4-21 hiding objects
quick tour 1-5
Map window 4-16 on 5-32

Index-1
Paradigm™

introduction 1-3 F legend 1-17

legend 1-17 File toolbar Log Display
objects browser 5-2 window 3-2
Cross Section
Open Section window 1-15, 5-3 printing 1-15
command 5-13 Log Display removing tracks 3-18
opening existing window 1-15, 3-3 saving 1-15
view 5-25 Map window 1-15, showing tracks 3-19
panels 5-5 4-16 terminology 3-5
Pillar Templates tracks 3-18
tab 5-2
G views
pillars 5-5
geologic cross section creating
printing 1-15 additional 1-11
saving 1-15 creating 5-7
opening
seismic 5-13 existing 3-14
showing objects H log tracks 3-5
on 5-32 horizontal well
solid painting 5-38 creating cross sections M
terminology 5-5 along 5-21
map
views
introduction 1-2
creating
additional 1-11 I quick tour 1-5
opening Information pane 1-29 map distance 1-29
existing 5-25 interval tracks 3-5 Map menu bar 4-15
visualizing features Map window
on 5-32 overview 4-15
L
visualizing objects quick tour 4-15
on 5-32 legend
maps
map, cross section, or
log display 1-17 browser
D log display in Map
deviated well window 4-15
introduction 1-2
creating cross section changing display of
quick tour 1-5
along 5-21 object properties
Log Display menu on 4-21
displaying bar 3-2
changing display of
objects 2-2 Log Display window objects on 4-20
distance overview 3-2 copying 1-15
2D 1-29 quick tour 3-2 Create Map panel 4-2
3D 1-29 log displays creating 4-2
between two adding tracks 3-18 creating from a 2D
points 1-29 copying 1-15 grid 4-11
map distance 1-29 Create Log Display creating from a
panel 3-8 surface 4-11
E creating 3-8 hiding objects
creating from a well on 4-19
expandable areas
log 3-8 introduction 1-2
Information
pane 1-29 creating from well legend 1-17
log 3-12 Map window 4-15
hiding tracks 3-19 opening existing
introduction 1-3 view 4-17

Index-2 GOCAD® 2009.1 User Guide

 Part
III

Visualization
printing 1-15 panning the camera Attribute
saving 1-15 view 2-2 Cross Section
showing objects pillars window 5-3
on 4-19 cross section 5-5 Log Display
views in log display 3-5 window 3-3
creating Map window 4-16
additional 1-11 Cross Section 5-3
R
opening Cross Section Set
existing 4-17 right mouse button, in
Cross Section
3D Viewer 2-2
visualizing object window 5-4
properties on 4-18, rotating the view in the
File
4-43 camera 2-2
Cross Section
visualizing objects window 1-15,
on 4-18, 4-43 5-3
S
why object might not Log Display
scale tracks 3-5
display on 4-20 window 1-15,
second screen 2-4
measuring 3-3
distance 1-29 seismic cube
Map window 1-15,
middle mouse button creating cross section 4-16
from 5-13
in camera 2-2 Options
Selection toolbar
monitors, using two 2-4 Cross Section
Cross Section window 5-3
mouse button
window 5-3
in camera 2-2 Log Display
Log Display window 3-3
window 3-3
Map window 4-16
N Map window 4-16
Selection
new showing
Cross Section
3D Viewer 2-4 object 2-2 window 5-3
solid painting 5-38 Log Display
stratigraphy tracks 3-5 window 3-3
O
structural interpretation Map window 4-16
object
visualizing on cross View
displaying 2-2 section 5-38 Cross Section
name window 5-3
ToolTip 2-2 Log Display
T
seeing the name in the window 3-3
camera 2-2 templates
Map window 4-16
Open Section pillar (log display or
Well Curves
command 5-13 cross section)
Log Display
Options toolbar adding tracks 3-65
window 3-3
Cross Section changing track
tracks
window 5-3 display
attributes 3-65 adding
Log Display
creating 3-62 log display or cross
window 3-3
section 3-18
Map window 4-16 introduction 3-61
hiding
logs, working
with 3-66 log display 3-19
P removing log display 3-18
panels tracks 3-65
cross section 5-5 toolbar

Rock & Fluid Canvas™ 2009 | Epos™ 4.0 Index-3

Paradigm™

removing using two W

log display or cross monitors 2-4
Well Curves toolbar
section 3-18
Log Display
showing
V window 3-3
log display 3-19 well section
View toolbar
traverse introduction 1-2
Cross Section
introduction 1-2 window 5-3
Log Display Z
U window 3-3
zooming the view in the
Map window 4-16
UNIX camera 2-2
viewer 2-4
opening another 2-4

Index-4 GOCAD® 2009.1 User Guide